SP29 3 PDF

HANDBOOK
ON
INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS
PART3 RIVETS,PINS,NAILS,KEYSAND
KEYWAYS,COTTERSANDOTHERNONTHREADEDFASTENERS
BUREAU OF INDIAN
MANAK
BHAVAN,
STANDARDS
9 BAHADUR SHAH
NEW DELHI 110 002
ZAFAR
MARG
gijj
I,
,;X1
I.,<
SP :29(Part3)- 1987
FIRST PUBLISHED MARCH 1989

FIRST REPRINT SEPTEMBER 1990
@ BUREAU -OF INDIAN STANDARDS
UDC 621.882.2/4.082(021)
ISBN 81-7061-005-2
PRICE Rs 280.00
PRINTED IN INDIA BY TARA ART PRESS, B-4 HANS BHAWAN, BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR
AND PUBLISHED BY BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS,
NEW DELHI-110002
MARG,
NEW DELHI- 110002;
PREFACE
The Bureau of Indian Standards is the national standards body working on standardization
front in this
country.
Its object is to promote fhe development
and adoption of standards
on national and
international
basis with a view to facilitate national and international
exchange of goods and services.
The standards play an important role in ensuring human safety and health, to safeguard consumers
interests and also have significant bearing on the national and world economy.
To make available the benefits of Indian Standards to the common man, BIS has introduced its
certification
marks scheme under the Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 1987. According to this Act,
quality goods conforming to Indian Standards carry the Standard Mark. This mark is the third party
guarantee for quality of the marked goods. Licences to use the Standard Mark are granted to the
manufacturers
using reliable methods of production and quality control subject to overall supervision
by BIS.
At international
level, BIS represents India on the International
Organization
for Standardization
(ISO) and the International
Electrotechnical
Commission
(IEC). BIS participates
in most of the
technical committees of IS0 and IEC.
While continuing
with the task of standardization,
which is a dynamic process, BIS has already
published national standards totalling over 11000 on wide-ranging subjects. Indian Standards are
generally published in booklet form in A-4 and A-5 sizes for any specific product/ aspect. A large crosssection of the users of these standards have often expressed their desire to have Indian Standards in
certain areas in the form of comprehensive handbooks. It is felt that these handbooks will provide easy
reference and also make Indian Standards more easily accessible to a larger public. Further, the
handbooks shall also help the user in understanding
the provisions of the standards which will enable
them to put the standards to better use.
In view of the above,the Bureau of Indian Standards
specific areas and the Industrial Fasteners Handbook
is bringing out a series of handbooks

is one of this series.
in certain
INTRODUCTION
A fastener is a mechanical device used for holding two or more bodies in definite positions with
respect to each other. The fasteners assume great importance as most of the engineering equipment and
machinery are, today, made up of many assemblies, which use fasteners to hold various components
together. Based on the application intended, fastener receives varying degree of built-in precision and
engineering capability. This has been adequately covered in the various national standards on fasteners.
Although, fasteners are low cost items in the assemblies when compared with the the total cost of
equipment, their importance cannot be under-estimated
because of the functional role they play. The
fasteners have a wide application in the entire gamut of industry. No wonder, it is said that a fastener is a
connective tissue of the industrial copus. A large cross-section of the users of the standards have often
expressed their desire to have Indian Standards available in a comprehensive
form and hence, this
Handbook
on Industrial Fasteners has been compiled.
The Handbook on Industrial Fasteners is one of the series of handbooks to be brought out by the
Bureau of Indian Standards.
Once published, the Handbook shall fulfil the long felt need for the
availability of Indian Standards on fasteners and related subjects in a comprehensive
form.
The Handbook on Industrial Fasteners is being issued in three parts. Part 1 covers standards on basic
features of fasteners, technical supply conditions
and raw materials for fasteners. However, the
standards on general engineering materials in use in the fasteners industry have not been covered.
Besides this, Part 1 also covers few general engineering standards and other standards in the related
field.
Part 2 covers the product
Part 3 covers standards
The national
Committees:
standards
standards
on bolts screws, studs, nuts and washers.
on rivets, pins, nails, keys and keyways, totters,

on fasteners
have been formulated
circlips, and set-collars,
mainly by the following
etc.
three Sectional
EDC 27 Bolts, Nuts and Fasteners Accessories

EDC 70 Screw Threads
EDC 71 Rivets (since merged with EDC 27)
As an aid to understanding
and application of the work of the above three Sectional Committees as
well as to cover other standards on fasteners, standards have also been included from the work of the
following Sectional Committees
EDC
1
EDC 11
EDC 12
EDC 15
EDC 20
EDC 39
EDC_ 43
EDC 44
EDC 50
EDC 61
EDC 74
MCPD 19
SMDC
1
SMDC
5
SMDC 10
SMDC 11
SMDC 17
SMDC 19
Engineering Standards
Machine Tools
Hand Tools
Builders Hardware
Drawings
Rolling Bearings
Engineering Metrology
Transmission
Devices
Mining
Conveyors, Vertical Hoists and Bucket Elevators
Aircraft and Space Vehicles
Packaging of Engineering Goods
Metal Standards
Wrought Steel Products
Light Metals and Their Alloys
Copper and Copper Alloys
Foundry
Alloy Steels and Special Steels
This Handbook
is a compilatlon of the national standards in the field of Industrial
Wherever practicable, corrections and amendments to the standards have been incorporated
Fasteners.
in the text.
The A-4 size standards

have been reproduced
as it is whereas A-5 size standards
have been
recomposed to match the style and format of A-4 size standards in order to haveuniform
presentation.
The Handbook has been divided into different sections, each one covering a group of standards on a
specific type or aspect of fasteners. The standards in each section are arranged in numerical order.
Numerical index is provided for the complete Handbook for easy location of a specific standard,
number of which is known to the user. The keyword (descriptors) index is provided at the end for easy
location of a standard, if the subject is known to the user.
This Handbook has been updated till March 1987. However, standardization
being a dynamic and
continuous process, users of the Handbook should take into account the fact that published standards
are subject to review and possible revision. It is pointed out that only the latest available edition is the
valid standard.
CONTENTS
Page
SECTION A
RIVETS
IS : 866-1957
Specification for Tinmens Rivets
IS : 1928-1961
Specification for Boiler Rivets (12 to 48 mm Diameter)
IS : 1929-1982
Specification for Hot Forged Steel Rivets for Hot Closing

(12 to 36 mm Diameter) (jirst revision) (with Amendment No. 1 & 2)
12
Specification for Cold Forged Solid Steel Rivetes for Hot Closing (6 to 16 mm
Diameter) first revision) (with Amendment No. 1)
18
IS : 2907-1964
Specification for Non-ferrous Rivets (1.6 to 10 mm)
23
IS : 2998-1982
Specification for Cold Forged Steel Rivets for Cold Closing (I to 16 mm

Diameter) first revision)
29
IS : 3974-1967
Specification for Bifurcated Rivets for General Purposes
36
IS : 4040-1967
Specification for Solid-Drilled Tubular and Semi-tubular Rivets
39
IS : 4732-1968
Specification for Rivets for Shipbuilding
42
IS : 9086-1979
Specification for Universal Head Aluminium Alloy Rivets for Aircraft
45
IS : 9087-1979
Specification for 100 Countersunk Aluminium Alloy Rivets for Aircraft
49
IS : 9088-1979
Specification for Universal Head Nickel Alloy Rivets for Aircraft
54
IS : 9093-1979
Specification for 100 Countersunk Nickel Alloy Rivets for Aircraft
57
IS : 2155-1982
SECTION B
61
PINS
IS : 549-1974
Specification for Split Pins (second revision)
63
IS : 2393-1980
Specification for Cylindrical Pins (second revision)
66
IS : 3524
(Part I)-1982
Specification for Threaded Taper Pins: Part 1 With Internal Threads
IS : 3524
(Part 2)-1982
Specification for Threaded Taper Pins: Part 2 With External Threads

(j%st revision)
71
IS : 4981-1984
Specification for Guide Pins for Foundry Pattern Plates (second revision)
74
IS : 6401-1971
Specification for Dowel Pins for Use in Foundries
77
IS : 6688-1981
Specification for Taper Pins lfirst revision)
83
IS : 6689-1972
Specification for Hardened Cylindrical Pins
86
IS : 6862-1981
Specification for Clevis Pins (@St revision)
88
IS : 6863-1973
Specification for Clevis Pins with Head
91
IS : 7368-1974
Specification for Grooved Taper Pins
94
IS : 7383-1974
Specification for Grooved Knuckle Pins
first
revision)
68
97
IS : ,7384-1974
Specification for Grooved Straight Pins with Guide End
100
IS : 7385-1974
Specification for Grooved Dowel Pins
104
IS : 7386-1974
Specification for Grooved Socket Pins
107
IS : 8351-1977
Specification for Spiral Pins (Heavy Duty Type)
110
IS : 8379-1977
Specification for Spiral Pins (Medium Duty Type)
113
IS : 10248-I 982
Specification for Cylindrical Pins with Internal Threads
117
SECTION C
NAILS
IS : 723-1972
Specification for Steel Countersunk Head Wire Nails (second revision)
121
123
IS : 725-1961
Specification for Copper Wire Nails (revised)
129
IS : 6730-1972
Specification for Felt Nails
134
IS : 6732-1972
Specification for Double Point Nails
137
IS : 6733-1972
Specification for Wall and Roofing Nails
139
IS : 6734-1972
Specification for Cut Lath and Lath Nails
142
IS : 6738-1972
Specification for Panel Pins and Lost Head Nails
145
SECTION D
KEYS, KEYWAYS AND COTTERS
149
IS : 2048-1983
Specification for Parallel Keys and Keyways (second revision)
151
IS : 2291-1981
Specification for tangential Keys and Keyways (second revision)
160
IS : 2292-1974
Specification for Taper Keys and Keyways first revision)
163
IS : 2293-1974
Specification for Gib-head Keys and Keyways (first revision)
168
IS : 2294-1980
Specification for Woodruff Keys and Keyways cfirst revision)
172
IS : 2638-1974
Specification for Flat Split Cotters first revision)
175
IS : 6166-1971
Specification for Thin Taper Keys and Keyways
178
IS : 6167-1971
Specification for Thin Parallel Keys and Keyways
181
SECTION E
MISCELLANEOUS
IS : 2995-1965
Dimensions for set collars
IS : 3075
(Part l)-1986
Specification for Circlips : Part 1 For Shafts Cfirst revision)
IS : 3075
(Part 2)-1986
Specification for Circlips : Part 2 For Bores Cfirst revision)
IS : 3075
(Part 3)-1986
Specification for Circlips : Part 3 Type E for shafts Cfirst revision)
IS : 4762-1984
187
191
206
221
Specification for Worm Drive Hose Clamps for General Purposes

@St
IS : 5988-1970
185
revision)
Specification for Spring Dowel Sleeves (Light and Heavy Patterns) for Use in
Foundries
227
232
Index
235
Numerical Index
237
IS0 Standards on Rivets, Pins and other Non-threaded Fasteners
238
SECTION
Rivets
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
IS : 866 - 1957
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
TINMENS RIVETS
0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 14 October 1957, on approval by
the Building Division Council of the draft finalized on 25 June 1957 by the Builders Hardware Sectional
Committee.
0.2 Tinmens rivets are commonly used in light sheet metal work, such as the manufacture
of buckets, steel
trunks and fabrication
of air-conditioning
ducts. As fasteners, they are required to conform to specific
requirements
regarding hardness, strength and workability. This standard specifies these requirements and has
been prepared with a view to guiding the consumers in procuring rivets of the desirable qualities suitable for light
sheet metal work. The specification covers rivets having lengths and diameters up to and including 14.3 mm and
7.0 mm, respectively. Large sizes of rivets known as flat head rivets are proposed to be covered by a separate
specification.
0.3 The Sectional Committee responsible for the preparation of this standard has taken into consideration
the
views of producers, consumers and technologists, and has related the standard to the prevailing manufacturing
and trade practices followed in the country in regard to the use of fhese rivets. Assistance has also been derived
from printed catalogues of manufacturers
of tinmens rivets.
0.4 This standard
requires
reference
to IS : 280-1951 Specification
0.4.1 Wherever a reference to IS : 280-195 1 appears in this standard,

version of the specification.
for mild steel wire (tentative).

it shall be taken as a reference to the latest
0.5 In pursuance of the decision of the Government

of India to introduce uniform system of weights and
measures throughout the country based on the metric system, all dimensions appearing in the standard have been
expressed in metric units.
0.6 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this specification is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with
IS : 2-1949 Rules for rounding off numerical values; the number of places retained in the rounded off value
should be the same as those of the specified value in the standard.
0.7 This standard is intended chiefly to cover the technical provisions
it does not include all the necessary provisions of a contract.
relating to the supply of tinmens rivets and
1. Scope
1.1 This standard lays down the requirements
rivets of sizes with even designating numbers
regarding material, shape and dimensions,

ranging from 2 to 20 inclusive.
and test for tinmens
2. Terminology
2.0 For the purpose
of this standard,
2.1 Nominal
Diameter
2.2 Nominal
the shank.
Length of the Rivet -
the following
of the Rivet -
The diameter
definitions
shall apply.
of the rivet shank.
The length measured from the underside
of the head to the extreme end of
3. Material
3.1 Mild steel wire used in the manufacture
3.1.1 The condition
under 7.
of tinmens
rivets shall conform
of wire selected by the manufacturer
3.1.2 The heat treatment
appropriate
to the condition
to IS : 280-1951.
shall be subject to the requirements
of wire used shall conform
laid down
to that specified under 7.
4. Shape and Dimensions

4.1 The shape of tinmens
Table I.
rivets shall be as shown in Fig. 1 and their dimensions
shall be in accordance
7
HANDBOOKONlNDUSTRIALFASTENERS-PART3
with
IS :$66
- 1957
FIG.
TABLE
RIVET
DIMENSIONS
OF TINMENS
( Clause 4.1 and Fig. 1 )
RIVETS
Head Thickness
Head Dia
Shank
Dia
Length
Rivet
Size.
Designating
Number
1 TINMENS
(B)
h
<
(0)
Max
Min
W)
A
Max
Min
(1)
(2)
mm
(3)
mm
(4)
mm
(5)
mm
(6)
mm
(7)
mm
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
4.0
4.8
5.2
6.0
6.8
8.3
9.1
11.5
12.7
14.3
2.1
2.4
2.7
3.1
3.8
4.2
5.2
5.6
6.4
7.0
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.4
7.8
8.5
10.7
11.4
13.0
14.3
4.0
4.6
5.3
6.0
7.4
8.1
10.2
10.8
12.3
13.6
0.6---0.6
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.1
1.4
1.5
1.7
1.9
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.9
0.9
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.6
5. Tolerance
5.1 The tolerance
on shank diameter
of tinmens
rivets shall be as given below:
Rivet Size
Designating
Shaizk Diameter
(If)
Number
2 to 12 both inclusive
5.2 The tolerance
on length of tinmens
At End
+ofaS
I - 0.13
+ 0.08
{ - 0.15
TZl
-0.13
i- Nil
-0.15
Rivet Size
Designating
Length
CL)
mm
+ 0.38
- 0.13
Number
6. Workmanship
c
Under Head
f 0.38
and Finish
6.1 The rivets shall be sound, free from cracks, flaws, burrs, seams, pits and other defects. The head shall be
concentric with and at right angles to the shank. The end shall be cleanly sheared square.
7. Heat Treatment
7.1 General -
The most satisfactory
metallurgical
upper critical point of the steel but provision

annealed vnter-annealed
wire.
.r
4
structure
is obtained
is also made for subcritically
HANDBOOK
if the rivets are annealed

annealed
above the
rivets and rivets made from
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :866 - 1957
7.2 Rivets should preferably be annealed at a temperature
above the upper critical Point appropriate
to the
carbon content of the wire. If the rivets are so annealed, the manufacturer
shall be free to select the hardness of
the wire without any limitation.
7.2.1 When annealed at a temperature above the upper critical point, the rivets shall remain at the following
temperature
for not less than 15 minutes:
a) When made from wire having a carbon content not exceeding 0.20 percent
b) When made from wire having a carbon content exceeding 0.20 percent but not
exeeding
920 C
88OOC
0.30 percent
7.3 Rivets may be subcritically

condition only.
7.3.1 When subcritically
30 minutes.
annealed
annealed,
provided
they are manufactured
the rivets shall remain
from wire in the half hard or hard
at a temperature
of 650-680C
for not less than
7.4 Rivets shall not require any heat treatment when manufactured
a tensile strength not exceeding 44 kg per sq mm.
FIG. 2 RlVETlNG
from annealed
or inter-annealed
wire having
TEST
8. Test
8.1 Tinmens
rivets shall comply with the requirements
8.1.1 Hardness test in tht-shank.
of tests specified under 8.1.1 and 8.1.2.
Rivets shall have Brine11 or Diamond
Pyramid hardness not exceeding
150 when tested
8.1.2 Riveting test - Rivet shall be inserted in the appropriate

hole in a plate so that the length of shank
protruding
is equal to the diameter of rivet. The shank protruding shall be flattened by hammering until the
thickness of the flattened portion is not more than 0.4 time the nominal diameter of the rivet (see Fig. 2), the
periphery of the flattened portion being free from cracks.
9. Packing
9.1 Tinmens rivets shall be packed in 2.5 kg or 5 kg parcels or cardboard
according to the requirements
of the purchaser.
cartons,
or in 50 kg gunny bags
10. Marking
10.1 Each package
shall be clearly and indelibly
marked
with the following:
a) Manufacturers
name or trade-mark,
b) Size of the rivets, and
c) Weight of the package.
10.2 Each package
may also be marked
with the ISI Standard
Certification
Mark.
Note - The use of the IS.1Certification Mark is governed by the provisions ofthe Indian Standards Institution (Certification Marks)
Act, 1952and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of ISI Certification Mark
may be granted to manufacturers or processers may be obtained from the Indian Standards Institution.
HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART
IS : 1928 - 1961
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR BOILER RIVETS
( 12 TO 48 mm DIAMETER
)
0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 17 October 1961, after the draft
finalized by the Screw Threads Sectional Committee had been approved by the Engineering Division Council.
0.2 This standard is one of a series of Indian Standards being prepared by the Institution on metric screw threads
and fasteners. This standard deals with mild steel rivets intended for use in the construction
of boilers. The
question of preparing a similar standard for high tensile rivets for,boiler construction
is under consideration.
0.3 At the level of the
ISO/TC7 Rivets, has at
considerably
modifying
international
agreement
International
Organization
for Standardization
(ISO), the Technical Committee,
present under consideration
a proposal to unify the metric and inch sizes of rivets by
the tolerance on the shank diameter or rivets. However, for obvious reasons,
on the subject is likely to take time to materialize.
0.4 Wherever a reference to any standard

version of the standard.
appears in this specification,
it shall be taken as a reference to the latest
0.5 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
IS : 2-1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised), The number of significant places retained in the
rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
0.6 Metric system has been adopted
in this system.
in India and all dimensions
0.7 This standard is intended chiefly to cover the technical

include all the necessary provisions of a contract.
and quantities
provisions
in this standard
relating to boiler rivets
have been given

and it does not
1. Scope
1.1 This standard
prescribes
the requirements
for boiler rivets, 12 to 48 mm in diameter.
2. Material
2.1 The rivets shall be manufactured
and stay bars for boilers.
from material
conforming
to 1s : 1990-1962 Specification
for stee1rivets
3. Manufacture
3.1 Rivets may be made either by cold-heading or by hot-forging. If rivets are made by the cold-heading process,
they shall subsequently
be adequately heat-treated so that the stresses set up in the cold-heading process are
eliminated.
If they are made by hot-forging process, care shall be taken to see that the finished rivets cool
gradually.
4. Freedom
from Defects
4.1 The rivets shall be cleanly finished with heads concentric with the shanks. They shall be free from
imperfections
and heavy scales. The ends of rivets shall be square, cleanly sheared and free from rag or burr.
5. Dimensions
5.1 Length-Diameter
given in Table 1.
Combinations
The preferred
5.2 Diameters of Rivets and Rivet Holes specified in Table 2.

5.3 Dimensions of Rivet Heads diameter, shown in Fig. 1 to 11.
length and diameter
The diameters
combinations
of rivets and corresponding
The heads of rivets shall conform to the proportions,
of rivets shall be as
rivet holes shall be as
in terms of the nominal
6. Tolerances
6.1 Shank Diameter
6.1.1 Nominal
diameters
(0)
12 to 24 mm
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :1928 - 1961
6.1.1.1 For rivets, five diameters long and under, the following tolerances shall apply (see Fig. 10):
a) At position X
+ 0.3 mm
- 0.1 mm
b) At position Y
+ 0.0 mm
- 0.5 -mm
c) Anywhere between position X andY
Diameter not to be greater than the maximum diameter

at position X nor less than the minimum diameter at
position Y
d) Out of roundness at any cross-section
Not more than 0.2 mm within the sizes resulting from the
tolerances mentioned in (a), (b) and (c)
6.1.1.2 For rivets above five diameters in length, the following tolerances shall apply (see Fig. 11):
a) At position X
+ 0.3 mm
- 0.1 mm
b) At position Y
+ 0.0 mm
- 0.5 mm
c) At position 2
+ 0.0 mm
- 0.5 mm
Diameter not greater than the maximum diameter at
position X nor less than the minimum diameter at
position Y
d) Between positions X and Y
e) Between positions Y and 2
+ 0.0 mm
- 0.5 mm
f)
Not more than 0.4 mm within the sizes resulting from the
tolerances mentioned in (a), (b), (c), (d) and @I.
Out of roundness at any cross-section
TABLE1 PREFERREDLENGTHAND
DIAMETER
COMBINATIONS
FOR RIVETS
( Clause 5.1 )
Alldimensions
Length
28
31.5
35.5
40
45
50
56
63
71
80
85
90
95
100
106
112
118
125
132
140
150
160
180
200
224
250
DiallWterS
12
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
-
Note -
16
-
14
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
X
X
X
-
Preferred
De&nation
Snap
in millimetres.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
18
-
20
-
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
-
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
X
-
combinatrons
22
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
are indicated
24
X
27
-
30
-
33
_
_
-
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xxicx
x
-
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
-
x
x
x
-
x
x
x
X
-
by X.
Example:
Head BoilerRiver20 X 90 (IS : 1928-1961).
36
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
39
-
42
-
48
-
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
IS :1928 - 1961
TABLE 2
RfVET HOLE DIAMETERS
AND TOLERANCES
ON THE HEAD
{ Clauses 5.2 and 6.3 )

All dimensions
Basic
Size of
Rivet
Rivet Hole
Diameter
Min
6.1.2Nominal
Fig. 10 and 1 I):
a)
At position
Tolerancee on
A
\
,
12
13.0
CSK head both

types (Fig. 7
and 8)
c
f 0.35
14
15.0
f 0.4
f 1.2
16
17.0
f 0.5
f 1.2
18
19.0
f 0.5
f 1.2
20
21.0
f 0.8
f 1.2
22
23.0
f 0.8
f 1.2
24
25.0
f 0.8
f 1.2
27
28.5
f 0.8
f 1.2
30
31.5
f 0.8
f 1.2
33
34.5
f 0.8
f 1.2
36
37.5
f 1.6
f 1.2
39
41.0
f 1.6
f 1.2
42
44.0
f 1.6
i 1.2
48
50.0
f 1.6
zk 1.2
diameters
Height
of Head
Diameter of Head
in milbmetres.
All other types
of head (Fig. 1
to 6 and 9)
/
i 1.2
(D) above 24 mm up to 48 mm -
Permissible .
Eccentricity
of Head
(a-b in
Fig. 12)
+ 0.8
- 0.0
+ 0.8
- 0.0
+ 0.8
- 0.0
+ 0.8
- 0.0
+ 1.2
- 0.0
+ 1.2
- 0.0
+ 1.2
- 0.0
+ 1.2
- 0.0
-I- 1.6
- 0.0
+ 1.6
- 0.0
+ 1.6
- 0.0
+ 1.6
- 0.0
+ 1.6
- 0.0
+ 1.6
- 0.0
0.7
The following
tolerances
0.7
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.3
1.5
1.6
1.6
1.8
1.8
2.0
2.0
shall apply (see
-I- 0.6 mm
- 0.2mm
Where specifically ordered, for rivets up to 33 mm diameter,
the tolerance shall be

+ 0.3 mm
- 0.1 mm
b) At positionY
+ 0.0 mm
- 1.0 mm
c) At position Z (in case of rivets longer

than 5D, see Fig. 11)
+ 0.0 mm
- 1.0 mm
d) Between positions X and Y
Diameter not to be greater than the maximum value at

position X nor less than the minimum value at position Y
e) Between positions Y and Z
+ 0.0 mm
- 1.0 mm
f)
Not greater than 0.4 mm within the sizes resulting from

the tolerances mentioned in (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
Out of roundness at any cross-section
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 1928 - 1961
I
t;
3
f
cc-D4
FIG. 2 ELLIPSOID
FIG. 1 SNAP HEAD
HEAD
l--D1
i--D4
FIG.3 PAN HEAD, TYPE
4 D For Rivets under 24 mm

I:3 D For Rivets 24 mm and over
FIG. 4 PLAN
HEADITYPE
250
FIG. 5 PAN HEAD WITH TAPERED
FIG. 7 COUNTERSUNK
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
NECK
FIG. 8 ROUNDED
HEAD
FASTENERS-PART
FIG. 6 CONICAL
HEAD
COUNTERSUNK
HEAD
IS : 1928 - 1961
FIG.
FIG. 9 STEEPLE
Nominal
THAN
on the length of the rivets shall be as follows:

Tolerance
Diameter
+F5
- 0.0
+ 2.0
- 0.0
+ 2.5
- 0.0
20 to 30
Above 30
on other dimensions
6.3.1 The maximum
FIVE DIAMETERS
--+
lJpmt:*0
6.3 Tolerance
0*5D
LONG AND SHORTER
FIG. 11 RIVETS LONGER

FIVE DIAMETERS
The tolerance
10 RIVETS
HEAD
1--_4.50
6.2 Length -
,L
-04250+3
inclination
of rivets shall be as given in Table 2.

G (see Fig. 12) of the head shall not exceed two degrees
b--Ita
&
++
FIG.
7. Tests for Finished

7.1 Sampling
Note --.A
10
12 TOLERANCE
ON RIVET
HEAD
Rivets
The method of sampling shall be mutually
recommended
method
of sampling
agreed upon between the supplier and the purchaser.
is under consideration.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 1928- 1961
1.2 Tests
7.2.1 Bend test - The rivet shank shall be bent cold and hammered until the two parts of the shank touch in
the manner shown in Fig. 13. There shall be no fracture on the outside of the bend.
7.2.2 Flattening test - The rivet head shall be flattened, while hot, in the manner shown in Fig. 14. The head
shall be flattened until its diameter is 2tA times the diameter.ofthe shank. There shall be no cracking at the edges.
FIG. 13 BEND TEST
FIG. 14 FLATTENING
TEST
8. Marking
8.1 Such marks as may be specified by the purchaser shall be stamped (raised or sunk) during the process of
manufacture on the head of all rivets.

8.1.1 The packages containing the rivets may also be marked with the ISI Certification Mark.
Note - The use of the IS1 Certification Mark is governed by the provisions ofthe Indian Standards Institution (Certification Marks)
Act and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The ISI Mark on products covered by an Indian Standard conveys the assurance that
they have been produced to comply with the requirements of that standard under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and quality
control which is devised and supervised by ISI and operated by the producer. IS1 marked products are also continuously checked by 1SI for
conformity to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of the IS1 Certification Mark may
be granted to manufacturers
or processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards Institution.
9. General Supply Conditions

9.1 The general requirements for the supply of rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 1387- 1959 General
requirements for the supply of metals and metal products.
10. Preservation and Packing
10.1 Preservation - Unless the purchaser has specified specific treatment at the time of enquiry or at the time of
placing the order, the rivet shall be supplied in a well-cleaned condition and suitably protected against rust in a
manner which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer.
10.2 Packing -
HANDBOOK
The rivets shall be packed in accordance with the best trade practice.
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS:1929 - 1982
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
HOT FORGED STEEL RIVETS FOR HOT CLOSING
(12 TO 36 mm DIAMETER)
( First Revision )
l* Scope - Covers the requirements Ofhot forged solid mild steel and high tensile steel rivets for hot closing in
the diameter range 12 to 36 mm intended for general engineering purposes.
2. Material - The rivets shall be manufactured from steel conforming to IS : 1148 - 1973 Specification for hot
rolled steel rivet bars (up to 40 mm diameter) for structural purposes (second revision) or IS : I l49- 1982
SPeCificatiOn for high tensile steel rivet bars for structural purposes (second revision). They may also be
manufactured
from steel conforming to IS : 226 - 1969 Specification for structural steel (standard quality) Cfifth
revision), provided that the steel meets the dump test requirements
given in IS : 1IL@- 1973.
3. Dimensions -
The dimensions of rivets shall be as shown in Tables 1 to 3.
3.1 Where the rivets with snap head and countersunk head are made with flat edge, the latter shall conform to the
values given in IS : 10102- 1982 Technical supply conditions for rivets.
3.2 The preferred nominal diameter-length combinations are given in Table 4.
4. Method of Manufacture - The rivets shall be made by the hot forging process and they shall be allowed to
cool gradually.
5. Acceptance Tests
5.1 General - The sampling and acceptance criteria of the rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 10102- m2.
5.2 Testsfor Material - The material used in the manufacture of the rivets shall be tested as per stipulations of
the relevant material specifications indicated at 2.
5.3 Shear Test _ When tested by the method prescribed in IS : 10102- 1982, the mild steel rivets shall satisfy a
shear strength of 260 MPa and high tensile rivets a minimum shear strength of 380 MPa.
minimum
5.4 Head Soundness Test - When tested by method prescribed in IS : 10102- 1982 rivets, at room temperature,
shall withstand the test without exhibiting any sign of cracking at the fillet between the head and the shank.
6. Designation
6.1 A mild steel snap head rivet of 16 mm diameter having a length of 70 mm shall be designated as:
Snap Head Rivet 16 X 70 -
IS : 1929
A high tensile steel snap head rivet of 16 mm diameter having a length of 70 mm shall be designated as:
Snap Head Rivet 16 X 70 HT -
IS : 1929
6.2 Rivets of other types shall be designated in a similar manner.

7. Marking
7.1 All rivets shall be marked with the manufacturers trade-mark on the head in raised figure. In addition, all
high tensile steel rivets shall be marked with the raised letter HT on the head.
7.2 ZSZ Certification Mark - The bags containing the rivets may also be marked with the IS1 Certification
Mark.
8. General Requirements
8.1 The general requirements for the supply of rivets and their workmanship shall be in accordance with
IS : 10102 - 1982.
8.2 Limits of surface cracks on rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 10102-1982.
9. Mode of Delivery -
12
Rivets shall be packed and delivered as specified in IS : 10102 - 1982.
HANDBOOK
ONINDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
1s : 1929- 1982
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
FOR SNAP HEAD
( Cluuse 3 )
All dimensions
RIVETS
in millimetres.
Max
12
12.8
(14)
14.8
16
16.8
(18)
18.8
20
20.8
(22)
22.8
24
24.8
(27)
27.8
30
30.8
(33)
33.8
36
36.8
Min
12.0
14.0
16.0
18.0
20.0
22.0
24.0
27.0
30.0
33.0
36.0
Min
11.3
13.2
15.2
17.1
19.1
20.9
22.9
25.8
28.6
31.6
34.6
Nom
19.2
22.4
25.6
28.8
32.0
35.2
38.4
43.2
48.0
52.8
57.6
MUX
19.5s
22.8
26.1
29.3
33.2
36.4
39.6
44.4
49.2
54.0
59.0
Min
18.85
22.0
25.1
28.3
30.8
34.0
37.2
42.0
46.8
51.6
56.2
Nom
Min
8.4
9.3
8.4
9.8
10.7
9.8
11.2
12.3
11.2
12.6
13.7
12.6
14.0
15.1
14.0
15.4
16.5
15.4
16.8
17.9
16.8
18.9
20.2
18.9
21.0
22.3
21.0
23.1
24.4
23.1
25.2
26.5
25.2
Mox
0.6
0.7
0.8
019
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.5
1.7
1.8
rk
14.5
16.5
18.5
20.5
NO??l
d,
Max
9.5
11
13
22
24.5
27
30
Note 1 - The nominal diameter d shown in parenthesis are of second preference.

Note 2 - For perpendicularity tolerance value, b, see IS : 10102-1982.
Note 3 - For permissible limits of shank diameter, see also IS : 10102- 1982.
Note 4 - Rivets shall be furnished with a definite radius under the head which shall not exceed the value r given.
Note 5 - The shape of head shall be forged into part of a sphere. Necessary flat land for trimming (see 3.1) on the head periphery
is permissible.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 1929- 1982
TABLE 2
DIMENSIONS
FOR FLAT COUNTERSUNK
HEAD RIVETS
( Clause 3 )
All dimensions in millimetres.
EDGE ROUNDED
d,
dk
Nom<
Max
Min
12
12.8
12.0
(14)
14.8
14.0
16
16.8
16.0
(18)
18.8
18.0
20
20.8
20.0
(22)
22.8
22.0
24
24.8
24.0
(27)
27.8
27.0
30
30.8
30.0
(33)
33.8
33.0
36
36.8
36.0
Min
11.3
13.2
15.2
17.1
19.1
20.9
22.9
25.8
28.6
31.6
34.6
Nom
Min
18
18.0
16.9
21
21.0
19.7
24
24.0
22.7
27
27.0
25.7
30
30.0
28.7
33
33.0
31.4
35
36.0
34.4
40.5
40.5
38.9
45
45.0
43.4
49.5
49.5
47.9
54
54.0
52.1
Ref-
5.2
6.1
6.9
7.8
8.7
9.5
10.4
11.7
13.0
14.3
15.6
MUX
(1 fY
0
60
Note 1 - The nominal diameters, d in parenthesis are of second preference.

14
N INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 1929- 1982
TABLE 3
DIMENSIONS FOR FLAT HEAD RIVETS

( Clause 3 )
--@102
I
1
IT 15/---
r
A.
t
@d,
@dl, --Od
,
I
i
--0.5d
Nom
Max
12
12.8
12.0
(14)
14.8
14.0
16
16.8
16.0
(18)
18.8
18.0
20
20.8.
20.0
(22)
22.8
22.0
24
24.8
24.0
(27)
27.8
27.0
30
30.8
30.0
(33)
33.8
33.0
36
36:8
36.0
Min
11.3
13.2
15.2
17.1
19.1
20.9
22.9
25.8
28.6
31.6
34.6
Nom
24
24.0
28
28.0
32
32.0
36
36.0
40
40.0
44
44.0
48
48.0
54
54.0
22.7
26.7
30.4
34.4
38.4
42.4
46.4
52.1
60
60.0
58.1
66
66.0
64.1
72
72.0
70.1
Min
d,
dk
Max
Min
Nom
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.75
7.50
8.25
9.6
Max
Min
3.6
3.0
4.25
3.50
4.75
4.0
5.25
4.5
5.75
5.0
6.25
5.5
6.75
6.0
7.65
6.75
8.40
7.50
9.15
8.25
9.9
9.0
Max
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.5
1.7
1.8
Note 1 - The nominal diameters in parenthesis are of second preference.

For permissible limits of shank diameter, see also IS : 10102- 1982.
For perpendicularity tolerance value, b, see IS : 10102- 1982.
Rivets shall be furnished with a definite radms under the head and shall not exceed the value, r given above.
Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 -
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 1929- 1982
TABLE
DIAMETER-LENGTH
COMBINATIONS
FOR HOT FORGED
RIVETS
( Clause 3.2 )
135
140
145
150
155
~
165
170
175
~-
36.0
Note 1 Note 2 -
16
The nominal diametres in parenthesis are of second preference.

The preferred lengths are between the stepped lines.
IS : 1929 - 1982
EXPLANATORY
This standard
was first published
NOTE
in 1961. In the present revision,the
following
major changes have been
made:
a)
The size range has been modified to 12 to 36 mm. The rivets in the present revision are meant for
manufacture by hot-forging only. Cold-forged rivets up to size 16 mm are being covered separately in
IS : 2155 - 1982 Specification for cold-forged solid steel rivets for hot closing (6 to 16 mm diameter)
(jkrt revision), and IS : 2998 - 1982 Specification for cold-forged steel rivets for cold closing (1 to
16 mm diameter) (first revision).
b)
Bend test and flattening

more realistic.
The method
The method
HANDBOOK
test have been substituted
of closing has been indicated.

of representation
of tolerances
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
by shear test and head soundness
for form and position
has been updated.
test which are
I : 2155 - 1982
COLD
FORGED
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
SOLID STEEL RIVETS FOR HOT CLOSING
( 6-to 16 mm DIAMETER
( First Revision )
Covers the requirements of cold forged solid steel rivets for hot closing in the diameter range 6 to
16 mm, intended for general engineering purposes.
1. Scope -
2. Material
2.1 The rivets shall be manufactured from steel conforming to IS : 7557 - 1974Specification for steel wire (up to
20 mm) for the manufacture of cold forged rivets. They may also be manufactured from steel conforming to
IS : 226 - 1975 Specification for structural steel (standard quality) (@A revision)provided that the steel meets
the dump test requirements given in 1s : 1148 - 1973Specification for hot rolled rivet bars (up to 40 mm diameter)
for structural purposes (second revision):
3. Dimensions
3.1 Dimensions of rivets shall be as shown in Tables 1 to 3.
3.2 Where rivets with snap head and countersunk head are made with a flat edge, they shall conform to the
values given in IS : 10102- 1982 Technical supply conditions for rivets.
3.3 The,preferred
4. Acceptance
nominal diameter-length combinations are given in Table 4.
Tests
4.1 General L The satipling and acceptance criteria of the rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 10102 - 1982.
4.2 Test for Material - The material used for the manufacture of rivets shall be in accordance with the
stipulations of the relevant material specifications at 2.1.
4.3 Shear Test - When tested by the method prescribed in IS : 10102- 1982, the rivets shall satisfy a minimum
shear strength of 260 MPa.
4.4 Head Soundnesr Test - When tested by the method prescribed in IS : 10102- 1982, the rivets at room
te?peratilre shall withstand the test without exhibiting any sign of marking at the fillet between the head and the
shank.
5. Designation
5.1 A snap head rivet of 6 mm diameter having a length of 30 mm shall be designated as:
IS : 2155
6.1 The general requirements for the supply of rivets and their workmanship shall be in accordance with
IS : 10102- 1982.
6.2 Limits of surface cracks on rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 10102- 1982.
7. Marking
7.1 All rivets shall be marked with the manufacturers trade-mark on the head in raised figure.
7.2 ISI Certification

Mark.
Murk -
8. Mode of Delivery -
18
The bags containing the rivets may also be marked with the IS1 Certification
Rivets shall be packed and delivered in accordance with IS : 10102- 1982.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUStRlAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 2155- 1982
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR SNAP HEAD RIVETS
( Cluuse 3. I )
t m OITl4 for d< 8

---O.Sd
1=2ITlSford>S
Nom
Max
Min
6.15
5.85
8.15
7.85
10
10.3
9.7
I2
12.3
11.7
(14)
14.3
13.7
16
16.3
15.7
d,
Min
5.82
7.76
9.4
11.3
13.2
15.2
Nom
9.6
919
9.3
12.8
13.1
12.5
16.0
16.36
15.64
19.2
19.60
18.8
22.4
22.8
22.0
25.6
26. I
25.1
8.4
8.69
8.11
9.8
10.09
9.51
11.2
11.55
10.85
dk
MUX
Min
Nom
k jMax
Min
r
rk
Max
-
Note 1 -
Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 permissible.

Notr 6 -
4.2
4.44
3.96
5.6.
5.84
5.36
7.0
1.29
6.71
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
5.7
7.5
9.5
0.7
11
0.8
13
The nominal diameter, d in parenthesis is of second preference.

For perpendicularity value b, see IS : 10102- 1982.
For permissible limits of shank diameter, see also IS : 10102- 1982.
Rivets shall be furnished with a definite radius under the head which shall not exceed the value, r given.
The shape of head shall be forged into part of a sphere. Necessary flat land for trimming (see 3.1) on the head periphery is
The value, h is eiven for snap design only and not intended for inspection purposes.
HANDBoOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART
1.S : 2155 - 1982

TABLE
DIMENSIONS

( Cluuse 3.1 )
All dimensions
HEAD
RIVETS
in millimetres.
EDGE ROUNDED
/aR
FLAT
: = NT14 for d*; 8

L = PIT15 for d > 8
Nom
Max
10
10.3
9.7
12
12.3
11.7
(14)
14.3
13.7
16
16.3
15.7
7.76
9.4
11.3
13.2
15.2
12
12
11.3
16
16
15.3
20
20
19.16
24
24
23.16
21
21
20.16
24
24
23.16
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
6.0
6.9
Min
6
6.15
5.85
d,
Min
5.82
dk
Nom
Max
Min
k
Ref
oc
FJ
5
0
Note 1 Note 2 -
8
8.15
7.85
j
1
600
900
The nominal diameter, d in parenthesis is of second preference.

For permissible limits of shan,k diameter, see ulso IS : 10102- 1982.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 2155-1982
TABLE 3
DIMENSIONS FOR FLAT HEAD RIVETS

( Cluuse 3.1 )
: - 4lTl4 for dC 6
I - PIT15 for d > 8
Nom
Max
h4in
d
d,
Min
12
12.3
11.7
(14)
14.3
13.7
16
16.3
15.7
7.76
9.4
11.3
13.2
15.2
20
20
19.16
24
24
23.16
28
28
27.16
32
32
31
Min
1.5
1.9
1.5
2
2.5
2
2.5
3.0
2.5
3
3.6
3
3.5
4.1
3.5
4
4.6
4
Mox
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
Max
Nom
5.85
10
10.3
9.7
16
16.0
15.3
Min
k
8.15
7.85
12
12.0
11.3
Nom
dk
6.15
Max
5.82
Note 1 - Nominal diameter, d in parenthesis is of second preference.

Note 3 - Fdr perpendicularity tolerance value 6. see IS : 10102-1982.
Note 4 - Rivets shall be finished with a definite radius under the head and shall not exceed the value, r given.
21
IS : 2155 - 1982
TABLE
DIAMETER-LENGTH
COMBINATIONS
(
Clause
Ail dimensions
Note 1 Note 2 -
FOR
COLD
RIVETS
FOR
HOT
CLOSING
3.3 )
in millimetres.
The nominal diametres in parenthesis is of second preference.

EXPLANATORY
This standard
FORGED
was first published
NOTE
in 1962. The following
major changes have been made in the present
revision:
a) Sizes 6 to 16 mm have been covered instead of 1.6 to 10 mm in the earlier edition. For sizes below
6 mm, IS : 2998-1982 Cold forged steel rivets for cold closing (1 to 16 mm);(should be referred. While
the manufacture
is restricted to cold forging, the method of closing by hot closing is indicated.
b)
cl
22
test have been deleted and substituted
The method of representation

the latest practices.
of tolerances
HANDBOOK
have been modified
ON INDUSTRIAL
according
test.
to
FASTENERS-PART
IS :2907 - 1964
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
NON-FERROUS
RIVETS i( i.6 TO 10 mm )
0. Foreword
0.1, This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 28 April 1964, after the draft
finalized by the Screw Threads Sectional Committee had been approved by the Mechanical Engineering
Division Council.
0.2 This standard is one of a series of Indian Standards being prepared by the Institution on metric screw threads
and fasteners. This standard deals with non-ferrous rivets, made of copper, tinned copper, brass and aluminium.
which are extensively used for general purposes. Mild steel and high tensile steel rivets of various sizes have been
covered in a separate standard.
b.3 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test, shall be rounded off in accordace with IS : 2- 1960
Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). I he number of significant places retained in the rounded off
value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
1. Scope
1.1 This standard specifies the requirements of copper, tinned copper, brass and aluminium rivets of sizes 10 mm
and below, intended for general purposes.
1.2 This standard does not cover rivets for aircraft or ship-building purposes.
2. Material
2.1 The copper rivets shall be made from copper rods having a minimum copper content of 99.85 percent (silver
being counted as copper) and having a minimum tensile strength of 22 kgf/mmr.
2.2 In the case of tinned rivets, tin used for tinning the copper rivets shall be of not less than 99 percent purity.
2.3 Brass rivets shall be made from brass rods having tensile properties conforming to Alloy 1 of IS : 320 - 1962
Specification for high tensile brass rods and sections (revised).
2.4 Aluminium rivets shall be made from aluminium rivet stock conformmg to IS : 740-1956 Specification for
wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy rivets, stock (for general engineering pruposes) (since revised).
3. Manufacture
3.1 Rivets shall be made by cold-forging and shall subsequently be appropriately
heat-treated, if necessary.
4. Freedom from Defects

4.1 The rivets shall be cleanly finished with heads concentric with the shanks and shall be free from
imperfections. The ends of rivets shall be square, cleanly sheared and free from rag or burr.
4.2 The tinning of tinned rivets shall be uniform and be free from spots, pin holes cracks, stams and blisters. The
tinningShall adhere firmly and be non-porous. It shall not peel off. They shall be finished smooth and bright all
over.
5. Dimensions
5.1 River Heads -
The heads of rivets shall conform to the proportions shown in Fig. I to 5.
5.2 The preferred length-diameter combinations of the rivets are given in Table 1.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
23
IS :2907-1964
FIG. 2.FLAT COUNTERSUNK
HEAD 120
FIG. 1 SNAP HEAD RIVET
FIG. 3 FLAT COUNTERSUNK
FIG. 4 FLAT HEAD RIVET
HEAD 90
FIG. 5 TOLERANCE
ON RIVET HEAD
6. Tolerances
6.1 Shank Diameter
The following table gives limiting values of shank diameter for rivets:
Shank Diameter
h
<
Nomjnal
mm
1.6
2
2.5
3
4
5
6
8
10
24
Maximum
mm
1.65
2.05
2.55
3.05
4.05
5.08
6.08
8.10
10.10
of Rivet
Minimum
mm
1.50
1.90
2.40
2.90
3.90
*a5
5.85
7.80
9.80
HANDBOOK
>
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :2907-1964
l
TABLE 1
PREFERRED
LENGTH AND DIAMETER

FOR RIVETS
( Clause 5.2 )
COMBINATIONS
All dimensions in millimetres .

1.6
2.5
10
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
9
10
12
14
X
-
16
18
20
22
X
X
24
26
28
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
_.__-.-.-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X indicates preferred length-diameter combination.
-.
6.2 Length -
The tolerance on the length of rivets shall be f 1.5 mm
6.3 Head Dimensions

Fig. 1 to 5).
Dimensions of heads of various types of rivets shall be as given in Tables 2 to 4 (see also
6.3.1 The maximum inclination
G (see Fig. 5) of the head shall not exceed 2O
7. Designation
7.1 Rivets conforming to this standard shall be designated by diameter, length and material.
Example:
A snap head rivet of 6 mm diameter, having a length of 30 mm and made of copper, shall be
designated as:
IS : 2907 copper
8. Tests for Finished Rivets

8.1 Unless otherwise agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier, the methods of sampling shall be as
recommended in IS : 2614- 1964 Methods for sampling of fasteners.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :2907- 1964
8.2 Tests
8.2.1 Hatterring test - From the sample rivets selected as specified in 8.1, a specimen of a length equal to the full
diameter of the stock shall be cut from the shank. It shall be cold-flattened in an axial direction as shown in Fig. 6
until the diameter is equal to twice the original diameter. It shall not crack as a result of this test. If the rivets are
submitted to any form of heat treatment after manufacture,
the flattening test shall be performed after such
treatment.
FIG. 6 FLATTENING
TABLE 2
DIMENSIONS
TEST
OF SNAP HEAD RIVETS
( Clause 6.3 )
1.6
2
2.5
3
4
5
6
8
10
26
Eeccntricity
3.05
3.75
4.62
5.50
7.30
9.05
10.80
14.36
17.86
2.55
3.25
4.12
5.00
6.70
8.45
10.20
13.64
17.14
Max
luin
1.08
1.32
1.62
1.92
2.55
3.15
3.15
4.98
6.18
0.84
1.08
1.38
1.68
2.25
2.85
3.45
4.62
5.82
HANDBOOK
01 Head
(see Fig. 5)
e
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
0.09
0.09
0.09
0.09
0.12
0.12
0.12
0.15
0.15
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :2907 - 1964
\
TABLE 3
DIMENSIONS
OF 120 AND 90 FLAT COUNTERSUNK
HEAD RIVETS
( Clause 6.3 )
1.6
2
2.5
3
4
5
6
8
10
Eccentricity
of Head
(see Fig. 5)
e
3.45
4.25
5.25
6.25
8.30
10.30
12.30
16.36
20.36
2.95
3.15
4.75
5.75
7.70
9.70
11.70
15.64
19.64
TABLE 4
0.46
0.58
0.72
0.87
1.16
1.45
1.74
2.32
2.90
0.80
1.00
1.25
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
4.0
5.0
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
It
f
0.09
0.09
0.09
0.09
0.12
0.12
0.12
0.15
0.15
DIMENSIONS OF FLAT HEAD RIVETS

( Clause 6.3 )
AI1 dimensions in millimetres.
1.6
.2
2.5
3
4
5
6
8
IO
HANDBOOK
Eccentricity
of Head
(see Fig. 5)
e
3.45
4.25
5.25
6.25
8.30
10.30
12:30
16.36
20.36
ON INDUSTRIAL
2.95
3.15
4.15
5.15
7.70
9.70
11.70
15.64
19.64
FASTENERS-PART
0.52
0.62
0.74
0.87
I.i5
1.40
1.65
2.18
2.68
0.28
0.38
0.50
0.63
0.85
1.10
1.35
1.82
2.32
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
0.09
0.09
0.09
0.09
0.12
0.12
0.12
0.15
0.15
27
IS :2907 - 1964
9. Marking
manufacture on the heads of all rivets except those having 14-mm head diameter and under.
9.1.1 The rivets may also be marked with the IS1 Certification Mark.
Note - The use of ISI Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards Institution (Certification Marks) Act,
and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. Presence of this mark on products covered by an Indian Standard conveys the assurance
that they have been produced to comply with the requirements of that standard, under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and
quality control during production. This system, which is devised and supervised by IS1 and operated by the producer, has the further
safeguard that the products as actually marketed are continuously checked by IS1 for conforming to the standard. Details of conditions,
under which a licence for the use of the IS1 Certification Mark may be granted to manufacturers or processors, may be obtained from the
Indian Standards Institution.

10.1 The general requirements for ;he supply of rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 1387-1959 General
fequirements for supply of metals and metal products (since revised).
11. Preservation
and Packing
placing the order, the rivets shall be supplied in a well-cleaned condition and suitably protected against corrosion
in a manner which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer.
11.2 Packing - The rivets shall be wrapped in waterproof paper packets or in cartons, the weight of the rivets in
the packets or cartons being 0.5 kg. Fifty such packets or cartons shall be suitably packed in wooden cases. Each
packet, carton or wooden case shall contain rivets of one size and type only.
28
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 2998 - 1982
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR COLD FORGED
RIVETS FOR COLD CLOSING
(1 TO 16 mm DIAMETER)
( First Revision )
STEEL
Covers the requirements of cold forged nvets, for cold closing in the diameter range 1 to 16 mm,
intended for general engineering purposes.
1. Scope -
2. Material - The rivets shall be manufactured from the following two grades or any other suitable steel
specified by the purchaser:
a)
Grade I - Steel class 1A ofIS : 18751978 Specification forcarbon steel billets, blooms, slabs and
bars for forgings Cfourth revision), and
b)
Grade 2 - Steel lOC4 of IS : 1570 (Part 2 )-1979 Schedules for wrought steels: Part 2 Carbon
steels (unalloyed steels) cfirst revision)
3. Dimensions
3.1 The dimensions of rivets shall be as given in Tables 1 to 4.
3.2 ,Where the rivets with snap head and countersunk head are made with flat edge, they shall conform to the
values given in IS : 10102-1982 Technical supply conditions for rivets.
3.3 The preferred nominal diameter-length combinations are given in Table 5.
4. Method of Manufacture
The rivets shall be made by cold heading process and shall be suitably annealed.
5. Acceptance
Tests
5.1 General -
The sampling and acceptance criteria of the rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 10102-1982.
5.2 Testsfor Material -The material used in the manufacture of the rivets shall be tested as per stipulations of
the relevant material specification indicated under 2.
5.3 Shear Test - When tested by the method prescribed in IS : 10102-1982, the rivets shall satisfy a minimum
shear strength as follows:
Grade 1 - 230 MPa
Grade 2 - 200 MPa
5.4 Hardness Test - When tested according to IS : 1500-1968 Method for Brine11hardness test for steel Cfirst
revision), the hardness on the head of rivet shall be as follows:
Grade 1 - 48 to 73 HRB (91 to 127 VPN)
Grade 2 - 56 to 78 HRB (100 to 139 V;plv)
5.5 Head Soundness Test - When tested by method prescribed in IS : 10102-1982, the rivets at room
temperature, shall withstand the test without exhibiting any sign of cracking at the filler between the head and the
shank.
6. Designation
6.1 A snap head rivet of 6 mm diameter having a length of 30 mm and made, for example, from material Grade 1
shall be designated as:
Snap Head Rivet 6 X 30 Grade 1 -
IS : 2998
6.2 A countersunk head rivet, with a countersink angle of 90, diameter 4 mm, length 24 mm and made, for
example, from material Grade 2 shall be designated as:
Countersunk Head (90) Rivet 4 X 24 Grade 2 -
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 2998
29
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
FOR SNAP
( Ciuuse 3.1 )
All dimensions
--@I
HEAD
RIVETS
in millimetres.
(0 2 IT l+EDGE ROUNDED
f = 2ITl4 for d I 8
I = 2ITl5 for d > 8
--0.5d
-
k.
l-
(1.4)
1.45
1.35
1.6
1.65
1.55
2.0
2. I
1.9
2.5
26
2.4
3.0
3. I
2.9
(3.5)
-3.6
3.4
4.0
4. I
3.9
5.0
5. I5
4.85
6.0
6,15
5.85
(7.0)
7.15
6.85
810
8.15
6.85
IO
10.3
9.7
16
16.3
15.7
6.82
7.76
9.4
15.2
16
16.36
15.64
25.6
26. I
25. I
7
7.29
6.71
II.2
Il.55
10.85
0.5
0.8
MOX
Min
1.2
1.25
I.15
ds
Min
1.13
1.33
1.52
1.87
2.37
2.87
3.37
3.87
4.82
5.82
dk
Nom
Max
Min
I .92
2. I2
1.82
2.24
2.44
2.04
2.56
2.76
2.36
5.2
3.45
2.95
4
4.25
3.75
4.8
5.05
4.55
5.6
5.85
5.35
6.4
6.65
6.15
8
8.3
7.7
9.6
9.9
9.3
Nom
Max
Min
0.84
1.04
0.64
0.98
1.18
0.78
I. I2
1.32
0192
1.4
1.6
1.2
I.75
1.95
1.55
2. I
2.3
1.9
2.45
2.65
2.25
2.8
3.0
2.6
3.5
3.74
3.34
4.2
4.44
3.96
Nom
r
*k
1.6
1.8
1.4
0.2
Max
=
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
~
~
-
1.2
1.4
11.2
Il.5
10.9
4.9
5.14
4.66
0.3
1.6
1.9
2.4
2.8
3.4
3.8
12.8
13.1
12.5
5.6
5.84
5.36
0.4
4.6
5.7
6.6
Nominal diameters, d in parenthesis are of second preference.

For perpendicularity
tolerance value, b see IS : 10102-1982.
For permissible fimits.of shank diameter, see also IS : 10102-1982.
Rivets shall be furnished with a definite radius under the head which shall not exceed the value r given.
The shape of head shall be forged into part of a sphere. Necessary flat land for trimming/( see3.1) on the head periphery
The values given for rk are meant for snap design and not for inspection purposes.
7.5
is permissible.
I3
TABLE 2
DIMENSIONS

( Clause 3.1 )
All dimensions
/--
HEAD (W/60)
RIVETS
in millimetres.
EDGE ROUNDED
OR FLAT
r = 2IT14 for d 5 8
t = 21T15 for d > 8
Nom
I
1.05
0.95
Mox
Min
1.2
1.25
1.15
(1.4)
1.45
1.35
1.6
1.65
1.55
2.0
2. I
1.9
2.5
2.6
2.4
3.0
3.1
2.9
(3.5)
3.6
3.4
4.0
4. I
3.9
5.0
5.15
4.85
d,
Min
0.93
1.13
1.33
1.52
1.87
2.37
2.87
3.37
3.87
2
2
I.75
2.4
2.4
2.25
2.8
2.8
2.65
3.2
3.2
2.9
4
4
3.7
5
5
4.7
6
6
5.7
7
7
6.64
8
8
7.64
10
dk
Nom
Max
Min
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.8
1.0
1.25
1.5
1.75
km
Ref
I
+50
0
Note 1 - Nominal diameters, d in parenthesis are of second preference.

Note 2 ~- For permissible limits of shank diameter, see o/so IS : 10102-1982.
4.82
10
9.64
6.0
6. 15
5.85
5.82
(7.0)
7. 15
6.85
8.0
8. 15
6.85
10
10.3
9.7
12
12.3
11.7
l(14)
14.3
13.7
16
16.3
15.7
6.82
7.76
9.4
II.3
13.2
15.2.
12
12
II.57
14
14
13.57
16
16
15.57
20
20
19.48
24
24
23.48
28
28
27.48
32
32
31.38
2.5
3.5
5.2
6.1
6.9
t
900
60
TABLE
DIMENSIONS

( Clause 3.1 )
All dimensions
HEAD
(120) RIVETS
in millimetres.
EDGE ROUNDED
/-- OR FLAT
t=2IT14ford%8
r = 2IT15 for d > 8
Min
1
1.05
0.95
1.2
1.25
I. 15
(1.4)
1.45
1.35
1.6
1.65
1.55
20
2.1
1.9
2.5
2.6
2.4
3.0
3.1
2.9
(3.5)
3.6
3.4
4.0
4.1
3.9
5.0
5.15
4.85
6.0
6.15
5.85
(7.0)
7.15
6.85
8.0
8.15
7.85
10
10.3
9.7
12
12.3
11.7
Min
0.93
1.13
1.33
1.52
1.87
2.37
2.87
3.37
3.87
4.82
5.82
6.82
7.76
9.4
11.3
Nom
Max
Min
2
2
1.75
2.4
2.4
2.25
2.8
2.8
2.65
3.2
3.2
2.9
4
4
3.1
5
5
4.7
6
6
4.1
7
7
6.64
8
8
7.64
10
10
9.64
12
12
11.57
14
14
13.57
16
16
15.57
20
20
19.48
24
24
23.48
0.29
0.348
0.406
0.468
0.58
0.725
0.87
1.015
1.16
1.45
1.74
2.03
2.32
2.9
NOWI
Max
d,
dk
k
w
Ref
Note 1 Note 2 -
The nominal diameters, d in parenthesis are of second preference.

For permissible limits of shank diameter, see also IS : 10102-1982.
3.48
TABLE 4
DIMENSIONS
FOR FLAT HEAD
( Cluuse 3.1 )
All dimensions
RIVETS
in millimetres.
t = 21T 14 for d 5 8
I = 21T 15 ford > 8
Nom
Max
Min
I
1.05
0.95
1.2
1.25
1.15
(1.4)
1.45
1.35
1.65
1.5
2
21
2.4
2.5
2.6
24
3
3. I
3.9 ,
(3.5)
3.6
3.4
4
4. I
3.9
d,
Min
0.93
1.13
1.33
1.52
1.87
2.37
2.87
3.37
3.87
Nom
Max
Min
2
2
1.75
2.4
dk
2.4
2.25
2.8
2.8
2.65
3.2
3.2
29
4
4
3.7
5
5
4.7
6
6
5.7
7
7
6.64
8
8
7.64
Nom
Max
Min
0.25
0.35
0.25
0.3
0.4
0.3
0.35
0.55
0.35
0.4
0.6
0.4
0.5
0.8
0.5
0.625
0.925
0.625
0.75
1.05
0.75
0.875
1.175
0.875
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
Max
Note
Note
Note
_~
Note
1
2
3
4
1.6
1.3
5
5.15
4.85
16
16.3
15.7
4.82
15.2
I
10
10
9.64
1.25
1.65
1.25
0.3
The nominal diameters, d in parenthesis are of second preference.

For permissible limits of shank diameter, see also IS : 10102-1982.
For perpendicularity
tolerance value, b see IS : 10102-1982.
Rivets shall be furnished with definite radius under the head which shall not exceed the value, r given.
32
32
23.48
27.48
31.38
IS : 2 998 - 1982
TABLE
DIAMETER-
LENGTH
COMBINATIONS
( Clotise 3.3 )
All dimensions
+g*5
ds10
0. o FOR d 0
1TOL+Y
FOR
FORGED
RIVETS
in millimetres.
NOMINAL
FOR COLD
1 1.2 (1.4) 1.6 2 2.5
DIAMETER
3 (3.5) 4
d
6 (7)
tne
(FOR REFERENa)I
Note 1 Note 2 -
~12
The nominal diameters in parenthesis are of second preference.

__.___----. ..- .-
34
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 2998 - 1982
7.1 The general requirements
IS : 10102-1982.
for the supply
of rivets and their workmanship

01 $5
(I
with
+50
7.2 Limits of surface cracks on rivets shall be in accordance
with IS : 10102-1982.
8. Marking
8.1 All rivets over 5 mm diameter shall be marked with the manufacturers
in raised figure.
8.2 ZSI Certification
Mark.
Mark
9. Mode of Delivery
This standard
The bags containing
the rivets may also be marked
Rivets shall be packed and delivered
was first published
trade-mark
and a letter Con the head

with the ISI Certification
as specified in IS : 10102-1982.
in 1965. In the present
revision,
following
modifications
have been
made:
a)
Sizes 1 to 16 mm have been covered
b)

are more realistic, and
The method
HANDBOOK
of 1.6 to 10 mm covered in the earlier edition,
test have been substituted
of representation
ON INDUSTRIAL
instead
of tolerances
FASTENERS-PART
test as the latter
has been updated.

35
IS :3974 - 1967
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FORBIFURCATED
RIVETSFOR
GENERALPURPOSES
0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 17 January
finalized by the Screw Threads and Fasteners Sectional Committee had been approved
Engineering Division Council.
0.2 Bifurcated rivets are extensively
plastics and leather. The bifurcation
1967, after the draft

by the Mechanical
used in large quantities to fasten many types of materials such as wood,

is formed by sawing or punching out the slot from a solid riyet.
value, observed or calc&ted,
expressing the result of a test, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS : 2-1960
Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant places retained in the rounded off
1. Scope
1.1 This standard
a)
b)
prescribes
the requirements
Oval-head bifurcated rivet, and

120 -countersunk
head bifurcated
for two types of bifurcated
rivets given below:
rivet.
2. Mater/al
2.1 The material for steel bifurcated rivets shall conform to C 15 of Schedule 11 of IS : l570- 1961 Schedules for
wrought steels fdr general engineering purposes. The percentage of each of sulphur and phosphorus in the steel
shall not exceed 0.05.
2.1.1 Rivets made from steel may be electroplated.
2.2 The material for aluminium
and aluminium
alloy bifurcated
rivets shall conform to IS: 740-1966
Specification
for wrought aluminium
and aluminium
alloys, rivet stock (for genera1 engineering purposes)
(revised).
2.3 The material.fol, brass bifurcated
rods and sections (revised).
rivets shall conform
for high tensile brass
3. Dimensions
3.1 The dimensions
4. Workmanship
for bifurcated
rivets shall be as given in Tables
1 and 2.
and Finish
4.1 The bifurcated rivets shall be well finished

bifurcation
shall be well formed.
and free from burrs and harmful
defects. The heads and the
5. Designation
5.1 The bifurcated rivets conforming
to this standard
number of this standard and the material.
5.1.1 An oval-head bifurcated rivet of nominal
made from steel, shall be designated as:
Oval Hd Bifurcated
shall be designated
size 4 mm, length 12 mm, Fonforming

,Rivet 4 X 12 -
51.2 A 120 countersunk

head bifurcated rivet of nominal
standard and made from aluminium shall be designated as:
120 CSK Hd Bifurcated
6. Preservation
by the type, nominal
to this standard
and
IS : 3974 Steel.
size 3 mm, length
Rivet 3 X 10 -
size, length,
10 mm, conforming to this
IS : 3974 Aluminium.
and Packing
6.1 Preservation - Unless the purchaser has specified a particular treatment at the time of enquiry or placing the
order, the bifurcated rivets shall be supplied in a well cleaned condition and suitably protected against Corrosion.
36
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS:3974-
1967
6.2 Packing - The bifurcated rivets shall be wrapped in water-proof paper packets or cartons, the wright of the
rivets in the packet or carton being 0.5 kg. Fifty such packets or cartons shall be suitably packed in wooden cases.
Each packet, carton or wooden case shall contain rivets of one size and type only.
7. Sampling
7.1 For the purpose of conducting tests for conformity of the bifurcated rivets to this standard, the sampling
bifurcated rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 2614-1964 Methods for sampling of fasteners.
of
,8. Marking
8.1 Such marks as may be specified by the purchaser
manufacture
on the heads of bifurcated rivets.
8.1.1 The bifurcated
rivets may also be marked
shall be stamped (raised or sunk) during the process of
with the IS1 Certification
Mark.
Note - The use of the ISI Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards Institution(Certification
Marks)
Act and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The IS1 Mark on products covered by an Indian Standard conveys the assurance
that they have been produced to comply with the requirements of that standard under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and
quality control which is devised and supervised by ISI and operated by the producer. IS1 marked products are also continuously checked
by IS1 for conformity
to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of the ISI
Certification
Mark may be granted to manufacturers
9. General
Supply
Conditions

for the supply of bifurcated rivets shall be in accordance
General requirements
for the supply of metallurgical
materials ($rsr revision).
TABLE 1
DIMENSIONS FOR BIFURCATED

( Cluuse 3.1 )
All dimensions
r
I (+ IT9)
3
4
5
6
.7
8
9
IO
I2
14
16
I8
_?
22
24
26
28
30
32
Note -
F--~---4
HANDBOOK
.
2
4
4
0.6
0.3
2.5
5
5
0.7
0.4
3
6
5.5
0.85
0.45
3.5
7
7
1.0
0.5
4
8
8
I.2
0.6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
For dimensions
ON INDUSTRIAL
RIVETS
in millimetres.
Oval Head
Nominal Size
d (is 12)
D (is 13)
R Nom
h (+ IT7)
with IS: 1387-1967
X.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
4.5
9
8.3
1.3
0.7
120-Countersunk Head
5
9.5
8.5
1.3
0.75
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
5.5
IO
8.5
1.3
0.8
6
IO
8.5
I.3
0.9
X
X
X
x.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
of II, c and A see Table 2
FASTENERS-PART
37
IS : 3974 - 1967
TABLE
BIFURCATION
DIMENSIONS
( C/awe
All dimensions
d
Above
2.5
3.5
4.5
5.5
38
RIVETS
in millimetres
Length Range
c
FOR
3.1 )
Up to and *
Including
4
6
9
4
6
9
14
4
6
9
4
6
9
16
4
6
9
16
4
6
9
16
22
4
6
9
16
4
6
9
16
24
4
6
9
16
4
6
9
16
26
6
9
16
6
9
16
30
6
9
16
6
9
16
30
6
9
16
6
9
16
32
6
9
16
6
9
*I6
32
2.5
4
5.5
7
2.5
4
5.5
7
2.5
4
5.5
7
12.5
2.5
4
5.5
7
12.5
2.5
4
5.5
7
12.5
4
5.5
7
12.5
4
5.5
7
12.5
4
5.5
7
12.5
4
5.5
7
12.5
HANDBOOK
0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95
1.2
1.2
0.95
0.95
0.95
8%
8%
5
5
12
8%
5
5
12
I2
8%
8%
5
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.95
0.95
12
1.8
1.8
1.2
1.2
1.2
12
1.8
1.8
1.2
1.2
12
1:8
1.8
1.8
1.2
12
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.2
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.2
.ON,,INDUSTRIAL
12
8%
8%
5
12
12
12
8%
12
12
8%
12
12
8%
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
FASTENERS-PART
IS :4040 - 1967
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
SOLID-DRILLED
TUBULAR
FOR
AND SEMI-TUBULAR
RIVETS
3. Foreword
I.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 17 January
inalized by the Screw Threads and Fasteners Sectional Committee had been approved
Engineering Division Council.
1967, after the draft

by the Mechanical
1.2 Solid-drilled tubular and semi-tubular

rivets are extensively used in large quantities to fasten many types
naterials, such as sheet metal and die-casting. In solid-drilled tubular rivets, the rivet hole is drilled deeper;
iome cases to almost all length of the shank whereas in case of semi-tubular rivets, the hole when swaged
mtruded is generally tapered. The use of these rivets is restricted to those applications where they are subjected
ihear rather than tensile stresses or where either of these stresses is negligible.
of
in
or
to
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS : 2-1960
1. Scope
1.1 This standard
a)
b)
prescribes requirements
Oval head, and

120 countersunk
for solid-drilled
tubular and semi-tubular
rivets of the following types:
head.
2. Material
2.1 The material for steel rivets shall conform to Cl5 of Schedule I1 of IS: 1570-1961 Schedules for wrought
steels for general engineering purposes. The sulphur and phosphorus in the steel shall not exceed 0.05 percent
each.
2.1.1 Rivets made from steel may be electroplated.
2.2 The material for aluminium and aluminium alloy rivets shall conform to IS : 740-1966 Specification
wrought aluminium
and aluminium alloys, rivet stock (for general engineering purposes) (revised).
2.3 The material for brass rivets shall conform
sections (revised).
for
for high tensile brass rods and
3. Dimensions
3.1 The dimensions
for solid-drilled
tubular
rivets shall be as given in Table
1.
3.1.1 The holes in the rivets are drilled up to the head or for a length of 12 mm, whichever
3.2 The dimensions
for semi-tubular
rivets shall be as given in Table 2.
3.2.1 The holes in the rivets may be made either parallel

4. Workmanship
is less.
or tapered
as given in Table 2.
and Finish
4.1 The rivets shall be well finished and free from burrs and harmful defects. The heads and the drilled holes shall
be well formed.
5. Designation
5.1 The rivets conforming to this standard
standard and the material.
shall be designated
by its name, nominal
size, length, number
of this
Examples:
a)
An oval head solid-drilled tubular rivet of nominal size 4 mm, length 12 mm and conforming
standard, and made from steel shall be designated as:
Oval Hd Tabular
b)
Rivet 4 X 12 -
to thir
IS : 4040 Steel.
A 120 countersunk
head semi-tubular rivet of nominal size 3 mm, length IO mm and conforming
this standard, and made from aluminium shall be designated as:
120 CSK Hd Semi-tubulay
3
Rivet 3 X 10 -
IS : 4040 Aluminium.
tc
IS :4040 - 1967
TABLE 1
DIMENSIONS
FOR SOLID-DRILLED
( Clause 3.1 )
All dimensions
TUBULAR
RIVETS
in millimetres.
yht
-++----l-----i
Oval Head
i+----L------J
120~Countersunk Head
Nominal Size
d (is 12)
D (is 13)
R Nom
dl Nom
h (+ IT7)
; (+ IT9)
3
4
5
6
I
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
33
6. Preservation
2.5
(3.5)
4
1.0
0.6
0.3
5
1.3
0.7
0.4
5.5
1.6
0.85
0.45
7
2.2
1.0
0.5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4
8
8
2.7
1.2
0.6
9
8.3
3
1.3
0.7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
(5.5)
9.5
8.5
3.3
1.3
0.75
10
8.5
3.5
1.3
0.8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
(4.5)
X
X
X
X
6
10
8.5
3.5
1.3
0.9
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
and Packing
6.1 Preservarion - Unless the purchaser has specified a particular treatment at the time of enquiry or placing the
order, the rivets shall be supplied in a well-cleaned condition and suitably protected against corrosion.
6.2 Packing - The rivets shall be wrapped in waterproof paper packets or cartons, the weight of the rivets in the
packet or carton being 0.5 kg. Fifty such packets or cartons shall be suitably packed in wooden cases. Each
packet, carton or wooden case shall contain rivets of one size and type only.
7. Sampling
7.1 For the purpose of conducting tests for conformity of the rivets to this standard,
be in accordance with IS : 2614-1964 Methods for sampling of fasteners.
the sampling
ofrivets
shall
8. Marking
8.1 Such marks as may be specified by the purchaser
manufacture
on the heads of the rivets.
8.1.1 The rivets may also be marked
shall be stamped
with the ISI Certificatisn
(raised or sunk) during
the process of
Mark.
Note - The use of the IS1 Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards lnstitution(Certification
Marks)
Act and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The IS1 Mark on products covered by an Indian Standard conveys the assurance
quality control which is devised and supervised by IS1 and operated by the producer. IS1 marked products are also continuously checked
by IS1 for conformity
to that standard as a further safeguard.
Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of the ISI
Certification
or processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards
Institution.
40
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :4040 - 1967
v
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
( Chuses
FOR SEMI-TUBULAR
3.2 and 3.2.1
All dimensions
l(+
IT9)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
in millimetres.
k!ht-
-+b------l-----i
Nominal Size
d (is 12)
D fjs 13)
R Nom
dl Nom
h (+ IT7)
1,
RIVETS
2.5
3.5
4.5
5.5
4
4
1.6
0.6
1.6
0.3
5
5
2
0.7
2
0.4
6
5.5
2.4
0.85
2.4
0.45
7
7
2.8
1.0
2.8
0.5
8
8
3.2
1.2
3.2
0.6
9
8.3
3.6
1.3
3.6
0.7
9.5
8.5
4.0
1.3
4
0.75
10
8.5
4.5
1.3
4.5
0.8
8.5
4.8
1.3
4.8
0.9
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

for the supply of rivets shall be in accordance
requirements
for supply of metallurgical
materials Cfirsr revision).
with IS: 1387-1967 General
IS :4732 - 1968
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
RIVETS FOR SHIPBUILDING
0. Forkword
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution
on 6 June 1968, after the draft
finalized by the Screw Threads and Fasteners Sectional Committee had been approved by the Mechanical
Engineering
Division Council.
0.2 Each classification
society has evolved its own specifications
for materials of construction
of a ship, in
general, and ships built in India are mostly governed by the rules and requirements
of Lloyds Register of
Shipping, London.
0.3 This specification for rivets for ships structure meets the rules and requirements
of Lloyds Register
Shipping, which are being followed for the merchant ships being built in India and abroad for India.
of
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS : 2-1960
1. Scope
1.1 This standard
prescribes
the requirements
of mild steel rivets, 16 to 33 mm in diameter,
for ships structure.
2. Material
2.1 Rivets shall be manufactured
steel rivet bars for shipbuilding.
from mild steel rivet bars, conforming
for mild
3. Manufacture
3.1 Rivets may be made either by cold or hot forging. If rivets are made by the cold forging process, they shall
subsequently
be stress-relieved.
4. Freedom from Defects
4.1 Rivets shall be free from imperfections
5. Dimensions
and Tolerances
5.1 The dimensions
and tolerances
5.2 Lengrh -- The tolerance

5.3 The maximum
inclination
of rivets shall be as given in Table 1.
on the length of the rivets shall be f1.5
mm.
(see Fig. 1) of the head shall not exceed 2.
FIG. 1
5.4 Tolerance
and heavy scales. The ends of the rivets shall be cleanly sheared.
on the other dimensions
TOLERANCE
ON RIVET
HEAD
of rivets shall be as given in Table
1.
6. Designation
6.1 The shipbuilding
standard.
42
rivets shall be designated
by the type of rivet head, size, length and the number
of this
HANDBOOKONlNDUSTRlALFASTENERS-PART3
IS : 4732 - 1968
Examples:
a)
A snap head rivet of size 20 mm, length 45 mm and conforming to this standard shall be designated as:
Snap Hd Rivet 20 X 45 -
b)
IS : 4732
A countersunk head rivet of size 24 mm, length 65 mm and conforming to this standard shall be
designated as:
CSK Hd Rivet 24 X 65 -
IS : 4732
7. Tests for Finished Rivets

7.1 Rivets shall be selected for testing by the Inspector or an authorized representative and tested in his presence.
7.2 Sampling
fasteners.
The sampling of rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 2614-1964 Methods for sampling of
TABLE 1
DIMENSIONS FOR RIVETS FOR SHIPBUILDING

( Clauses 5.1 and 5.4 )
SNAP
Size d
COUNTERSUNK
HEAD
HEAD
Lengths
CSK Angle a
Eccentricity
Basic
Nom
To1
16
Basic
To1
25.6
Snap
CSK
11.2
To1
Max
Max
From
To
Increment
Steps
Basic
27
90
33
_~30
45
114
102
126
3
3
3
60
45
126
45
63
162
69
180
69
180
To1
0.8
+ 0.8
20
,I8
22
- 0.4
+0.8
32.0
28.8
35.2
f 0.5
14.0
126
15.4
15
12
15
-0
+ 1.2
25
16.8
20
-0
18.9
20
1.Y
v
24
38.4
27
30
43.2
+ 1.2.
- 0.4
33
f 1.2
2.0
+ 00
- 20
1.0
3.5
48.0
21.0
52.8
23.i
20.5 + 1.6
-0
20.5
3.0
35
The rivet shank shall be bent cold and hammered until the two parts of the shank touch in the
manner shown in Fig. 2. There shall be no fracture on the outside of the bend.
7.3 Bend Test -
7.4 Flattening Test - The rivet head shall be flattened, while hot, in the manner shown in Fig. 3. The head shall
be flattened until its diameter is two and half times the diameter of the shank. There shall be no cracking at the
edges.
7.5 Sulphur Print Test - Rivets shall be selected for examination by means of sulphur prints and the material
shall be free from .marked central segregation of sulphur and other non-metallic substances.
8. Marking and Certificates
manufacture on the heads of all rivets.

HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
43
IS .: 4732 - 1968
FIG. 2 BEND TEST

8.1.1 Test and inspection
certificates
8.1.2 The *packages containing
FIG. 3 FLATTENING
from the inspection
authority
the rivets may also be marked
TEST
shall be furnished
by the supplier.
with the IS1 Certification
Mark.
Note -The
use of the ISICertification
Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards lnstitution(Certification
Marks)
Act and the Rules and Regulations niade thereunder. The ISI Mark on products covered by an Indian Standard conveys the assurance
quality control which is devised and supervised by IS1 and operated by the producer. IS1 marked products are also continuously checked
by ISI for conformity
to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of the ISI
Certification

for the supply of rivets shall be in accordance
requirements
for the supply of metals agd metal products (since revised).
10. Preservation
with IS: 1387-1959 General
and Packing
placing the order, the rivets shall be supplied in a well cleaned condition and suitably protected against rust in a
manner which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer.
10.2 Packing -
The rivets shall be packed in accordance
with the best trade&practice.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
3
I
IS :9086- 1979
Indian Standard
UNIVERSAL
SPECIFICATION
FOR
HEAD ALUMINIUM
ALLOY
FOR AIRCRAFT
RIVETS
1. Scope - Covers material, dimensions, identification and other requirements for universal head aluminium
alloy rivets for use in aircraft.
2. Material
2.1 The chemical composition of the alloys shall be as given in IS : 5902 - 1970Specification for aluminium and
aluminium alloy rivet stock for cold forged rivets for aircraft purposes. The following are the preferred grades:
Alloy No.
1
Material Grade
55 000
22 500
3.
24 530
2.2 The condition of supply, heat treatment and mechanical properties of wire used for manufacture or rivets
shall be as follows:
Cendition as Delivered to
Rivet Maker
Annealed
or
strain-hardened
Heat Treaiment to be
Given to Tensile Test
anil
None
stabilized
2
Minimum
Shear
Strength*
N/mm
270
360 luaxt
170
270
180
410
260
Annealed and cold-drawn to secure

not less than 20 percent .
Solution-treated at 495 f 5OC
and aged for not less than
4 days at room temperature
-,
Minimum
Tensil
Strength*
of Test
Sample
N/mm2
Not more than 40 percent

tion in cross-sectional area
reduc-
*Tensile strength and shear strength are included as alternatives.

TMaximum value associated with maximum hardness condition.
HANDROOX ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART
45
IS :9086- 1979
2.3 The condition of supply, heat treatment and mechanical properties of the rivets shall be as follows:
by Rivet Maker
Before Delivery
Condition as
Delivered
As manufactured
Solution-treated and
aged
aged for not less
than 4 days
As delivered*
As closed
None
As manufactured
closed within a
short period (for
example, 2 hours at
room temperature
unless refrigerated)
Aged (for example, not

less than 4 days at
room temperature
after closing)
1-*Rivets in alloy No. I and 2 shall not be heat-treated
after delivery.
3. Dimensions
3.1 Shank
NomInaI Diameter,
Tolerance
46
1.6
f 0.05
2.4
+ 0.06
- 0.04
3.2
f 0.05
4.0
i 0.06
4.8
+ 0.05
- 0.07
5.6
+ 0.05
- 0.07
6.4
+ 0.05
- 0.07
8.0
+ D.03
- 0.10
9.6
+ 0.03
- 0.10
IS :9086 - 1979
3.2 Head
x = 13 +r
Within length x, for shank diameter value may increase to d,,,,
0
+ 0.05.
Head to be concentric with shank within 0.25 mm.

All dimensions
Nominal Shank
Diameter,
1.6
2.4
3.2
4.0
4.8
5.6
6.4
8.0
9.6
in millimetres.
G
(Pef 6nly,
f0.25
3.2
4.7
6.4
1.9
9.5
Il.0
12.7
15.9
19.0
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
0.15
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.8
0.9
0.7
1.0
1.4
1.7
20
2.4
2.7
3.4
4.1
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
20
24
1.4
2.1
2.7
3.4
4.2
4.9
5.5
6.9
8.3
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
4. Identification Symbols
4.1 The rivets shall be marked on the head or end of the shank with symbols. The symbols for the alloys No. 1
and 3 shall be embossed, having a height of approximately 0.2 mm. The indented point for alloy No. 2 shall have
a depth of approximately 0.2 mm. The symbols are shown below:
Alloy No.
Identiflc~tion Symbol
Embossed
7
Indented
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
Embossed
FASTENERS-PART
IS :9086 - 1979
4.2 The following colours
Alloy
Alloy
Alloy
may
No.
No.
No.
also be used in addition to symbols to identify the rivets;

Green
1
Violet
2
Self colour
3
5. General Requirements - Unless specified otherwise, the general requirements for rivets shall conform to
IS : 9089-1979 General requirements for rivets of aluminium and aluminium wrought alloys for aircraft.
6. Designation
Shall be designated by the rivet diameter, alloy number and number of this standard.
Example:
A universal head rivet of diameter 9.6 mm and conforming to alloy No. 2 shall be designated as:
Universal Head Rivet 9.6 Alloy 2 -
IS : 9086.
7. Packing -
As agreed between the purchaser and the supplier.
8. Marking -
All packages shall be marked with the following information:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Manufacturers name or trade-mark, if any;

Rivet designation;
Quantity; and
Particulars of Inspector or Inspectors stamp.
8.1 ZSI Certification Marking -
Details available with the Indian Standards Institution.
EXPLANATORY
NOTE
This standard is one of the series of Indian Standards on rivets for aircraft use. It conforms to ISO/ DIS
3230 Aircraft aluminium alloy rivets-Basic dimensions, materials and identification symbols, issued by the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO).
48
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :9087 - 1979
1
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
100 COUNTERSUNK
ALUMINIUM
ALLOY
FOR AIRCRAFT
1. Scope - Covers material, dimensions,

aluminium
alloy rivets for use in aircraft.
identification
and other requirements
RIVETS
for 100 countersunk
head
Material
1 The chemical coniposition of the alloys shall be as given in IS : 5902 - 1970 Specification for aluminium and
uminium alloy rivet stock for cold forged rivets for aircraft purposes. The preferred alloys for this standard are
i follows:
Alloy No.
Material Grade
55 000
22 500
24 530
2 The condition of supply, heat treatment

la11 be as follows:
Alloy
No.
Condition as Delivered
Rivet Maker
and mechanical
to
properties
Heat Treatment to be
Given to Tensile Test
Sample
*
I
I
3
Annealed or strain-hardened
stabilized
Annealed
secure
and cold-drawn
Minimum
Tensile
Stren#b*
of Test
Sample,
N/mm2
to
None
270
360 IWaxt
None
270
I-
I
Solution-treated at 495 f 5O C
and aged for not less than
4 days at room tempera-
410
260
-.
tMaximum value associated with maximum hardness condition.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
of rivets
and
Not less than 20 percent and not

more than 40 percent reduction
in cross-sectional area
of wire used for manufacture
FASTENERS-PART
I
49
IS :9087 - 1979
2.3 The condition of supply, heat treatment. and mechanical properties of the rivets shall be as follows:
Heat Treatment
by Rivet Maker
Before Delivery
Alloy
No.
Condition as
Delivered
Condition at the
Time of Closing
Condition
When in
Use
As manufactuced
As delivered*
As closed
aged
aged for not less
than 4 days
As delivered+
As closed
None
As manufactured
closed within a
short period (for
example, 2 hours at
room temperature
unless refrigerated)
Aged (for example, not

less than 4.days at
room temperature
after closing)
--
*Rivets in alloy No. 1 and 2 shall not be heat-treateo alter delivery.
3.. Dimensions
3.1 Shank
All dimensions in millimetres
Nominal Diameter,
d
1.6
f 0.05
2.4
+ 0.06
- 0.04
3.2
4.0
50
Tolerance
f 0.05
f 0.04
- 0.06
4.8
+ 0.03
- 0.07
3.6
+ 0.03
- 0.07
-6.4
+ 0.03
- 0.07
8.0
+o
+ 0.10
9.6
+ 0.03
__- 0.10
HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRtAL FASTENERS-PART
IS : 9087- 1979
3.2 Head
OP
x = 1.3 i- r i- B, where B is the height of the head.

Within length x, the shank diameter value may increase to d,,,
Head to be concentric with shank within 0.25 mm.
+ 0.05.

A
Nominal Shank
Diameter
1.6
2.4
3.2
4.0
4.8
5.6
6.4
8.0
9.6
3.3 Flushness
Max
Min
3.00
4.65
5.80
7.35
9.05
10.65
12.20
14.45
17.70
2.80
4.45
5.60
7.15
8.85
10.45
12.00
14.25
17.50
C
IRef Only)
(Ref 6nly)
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
Tolerance
Flushness
tolerance
P,,,,, -
Pmi.
where
p
max=Am, - N x cot 50
2
mm
= Amin2
x cot 500
where
N is the gauging diameter,
A is the head diameter.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
and
FASTENERS-PART
51
IS : 9087 - 1979
3.3.1
All dimensions
Nominal Shank
Diameter, d
Protrusion, P
Gauge Diameter,
N
-
1.6
2.4
3.2
4.0
4.8
5.6
6.4
8.0
9.6
4. Identification
in millimPtres.
2.465
3.837
4.875
6.170
7..570
8.890
10.180
12.200
14.940
Flushness
Tolerance
Max
Min
0.224
0.320
0.388
0.516
0.642
0.717
0.805
0.925
1.158
0.140
0.236
0.304
0.432
0.558
0.633
0.721
0.839
1.074
0.084
0.084
0.084
0.084
0.084
0.084
0.084
0.084
0.084
Symbols
4.1 The rivets shall be marked on the head or end of the shank with symbols. The symbols for the alloys No. l
and 3 shall be embossed, having a height of approximately
0.2 mm. The indented point for alloy No. 2 shall have
a depth of approximately
0.2 mm. The symbols are shown below:
4.2 The following
corours may also be used in addition

Alloy No. 1
Alloy No. 2
Alloy No. 3
52
to symbols
to identify
the rivets:
Green
Violet
Self colour
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :9087 - 19,79
5. GeneralRequirements
- Unless specified otherwise, the general requirements
for rivets shall conform to
IS : 9089-1979 General requirements
for rivets of aluminium and aluminium wrought alloys for aircraft.
6. Designation
Shall be designated
by the rivet diameter,
alloy number
and number
of this standard.
Example:
A 100 countersunk
head rivet of diameter
100Countersunk
7. Packing
8. Marking
a)
b)
c)
d)
As agreed between
All packages
Head Rivet 6.4 Alloy 3 -
the purchaser
shall be marked
64 mm, material
alloy No. 3 shall be designated
as:
IS : 9087.
and the supplier.
with the following
information:
Manufacturers
name or trade-mark,
if any,
Rivet designation,
Quantity, and
Particulars of Inspector or Inspectors stamp.
8.1 ISZ Certljhztion
Marking -
Details available
with the Indian
EXPLANATORY
Standards
Institution.
NOTE
This standard is one of the series of Indian Standards on rivets for aircraft use. It conforms to ISO/ DIS
3230 Aircraft Aluminium alloy rivets-Basic
dimensions, materials and identification
symbols, issued by the
International
Organization
for Standardization
(ISO).
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
53
IS :9088 - 1979
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
UNIVERSAL HEAD NICKEL ALLOY
FOR AIRCRAFT.
Scope - Covers material,

vets for use in aircraft.
dimensions,
identification
RIVETS
for universal
head nickel alloy
Material
1 The preferred
chemical
composition
for nickel alloys used for rivets shall be as given below:
Element
Composition,
Alloy No.
CU
Si
Fe
Mn
Cr
Al
C
s
co
Ti
28 to 34
SO.5
9.5
0.3 to 2.0
-
N;
Remainder
Percent
Alloy No. 2
3.5.
51.0
15.0
II .o
18.0 to 21 .o
SO.5
10.16
SO.024
-
2 The condition
of supply, heat treatment
vlets shall be as given below:
0.08 to 0.15
10.5
0.2 to 0.6
Remainder
and mechanical
properties
of rivet wire used for manufacture
Alloy No.
Condition as
Delivered to
Rivet Maker
Heat Treatment
for Tensile
Test Sample,
N/mm
Minimum*
Tensile
Strength of
Test Sample,
N/mm
Minimum*
Shear Strength
N/mm
Annealed
Annealed
None
None
490
650
350
450
of
3 The condition
Alloy
No.
1
2
of supply, heat treatment,
Minimum
Tensile
Strength* of
Test Sample,
N/mm
490
650
Minimum
Shear
Strengtht
N/mm
350
450
mechanical
properties
of rivet shall be as given below:
Heat Treatment
by Rivet Maker
Before
Delivery
Condition
as Delivered
Condition at
the Time of
Closing
Condition
When in
Use
Annealed
As manufactured
As delivered
As closed
As manufactured
As delivered
As closed
None
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTFNERS-PART
IS :9088 - 1979
3. Dimensions
3.1 Shank
All dimensions
in millimetres.
Nomihel Diameter. d
Tolerance
1.6
f 0.05
2.4
+ 0.06
- 0.04
3.2
f 0.05
4.0
f 0.06
4.8
f 0.05
- 0.07
5.6
+ 0.05
- 0.07
6.4
+ 0.05
- 0.07
8.0
+ 0.03
- 0.10
9.6
+ 0.03
-0.10
3.2 Head
-E-
SHARP
EDGE
REMOVED
1
r
-+lx = 113+ r
Within length x the shank diameter value may increase to d,,,, + 0.05.
All dimensions
Nominal Shank
Diameter
c
(ReI 6nIy)
+ 0.25
d
3.2
4.7
6.4
7.9
9.5
1.6
2.4
3.2
4.0
4.8
5.6
6.4
8.0
9.6
HANDBOOK
in millimetres.
f
f
f
f
f
11.0 f
12.7 f
15.9 f
19.0 f
ON INDUSTRIAL
0.7
1.0
1.4
1.7
2.0
2.4
2.7
3.4
1.4
0.15
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.8
0.9
FASTENERS-PART
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
20
2.4
1.4
2.1
2.7
3.4
4.2
4.9
5.5
6.9
8.3
0.15
.0.15
0.15
0.25
0.25
9.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
IS :9088
- 1979
4. Identification
4.1 The rivets shall be marked on the head or on the end of the shank with symbols as indicated below:
Alloy NG.
-7
identiflcat~oa Symbol
0.8mm
mar,.
Indented
0*8mm max.
Indented
4.2 Identification
symbols shall have the depth of approximately 0.2 mm.
5. Designation
standard.
Shall be designated by the rivet diameter, length, material alloy number and number of this
Example:
A universal head rivet of diameter 8 mm, length 10 mm, material alloy No. 1 and conforming to this
standard shall be designated as:
6. Packing -
Universal Head Rivet 8 X 10 Alloy 1 As agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier.
7. Marking -
All packages shall be marked with the following information:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Manufacturers name or trade-mark,

Rivet designation,
Quantity, and
Particulars of Inspector or Inspectors stamp
7.1 ZSI Certjjication Marking -
IS : 9088
Details available with the Indian Standards Institution.
EXPLANATORY
NOTE
This standard ii one of the series of Indian standards on aircraft rivets. This standard conforms to
lSO/ DIS 3229 Aircraft-Nickel
the International
Organization
56
alloy rivets-Basic
for Standardization
dimensions,
(ISO).
materials
HANDBOOK
and identification
ON INDUSTRIAL
symbols, issued by
FASTENERS-PART
1s :9093 - 1979
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
100 COUNTERSUNK
NICKEL ALLOY
RIVETS FOR AIRCRAFT
1. Scope aircraft.
Covers material,
dimensions,
identification
for nickel alloy rivets for use in
2. Material
2.1 The preferred
chemical
composition
for nickel alloys shall be as below:
Element
Composition,
CU
Si
Fe
Mn
Cr
Al
C
S
co
Ti
Ni
Alloy No.
_
Altoy No. 2
20 to 34
5 0.5
52.5
0.3 to 2.0
-
IO.5
I 1.0
I 5.0
5 1.0
18.0 to 21.0
-
IO.5
lo.16
5 0.024
0.08 to 0.15
5 0.5
0.2 to 0.6
Remainder
Remainder
2.2 The conditions of supply, heat treatment

i_
Percent
Alloy No. 1
and mechanical
characteristics
of the wire used for manufacture
Minimum*
Shear Strength,
Condition as
Delivered to
Rivet Maker
Heat Treatment
to be Given to
Tensile Test
Sample
Minimum*
Tensile
Strength of
Test Sample,
N/mm
Annealed
None
490
350
Annealed
None
650
450
~-
-, ___- _-
of
N/mm
.--
3. Dimensions
3.1 Shank
All dimensions
Nominal
Shank Diameter,
Tolerances
ON INDUSTRIAL
on Shank Diameter
1.6
f 0.05
2.4
-I- 0.06
- 0.04
* 0.05
3.2
HANDBOOK
in millimetres.
4.0
+ 0.04
- 0.06
4.8
+ 0.03
- 0.01
5.6
-I- 0.03
- 0.07
6.4
-I- 0.03
- 0.07
8.0
+o
- 0.10
9.6
+o
- 0.10
FASTENERS-PART
57
IS :9093 - 1979
3.2 Head
Countersunk
dav + 0.5.
head x = 1.3 t r + B, where
B is the height of the head. Within length x, the shank diameter
All dimensions
Nominal
Diameter
1.6
2.4
3.2
4.0
4.8
5.6
6.4
8.0
9.6
A
1
Mux
3.00
4.60
5.80
1.35
9.05
10.65
12.20
14.45
17.70
value may increase to
in millimetres.
Min
B
(Ref Only)
C
(Ref Only)
Flushness
Toleraince
(Ref 6nly)
2.80
4.45
5.60
7.15
8.85
10.45
12.00
14.25
17.50
0.6
0.9
1.1
1.4
1.8
2.1
2.4
2.7
3.4
o.is
0.15
0.15
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.10
0.10
0.13
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.18
0.20
0.23
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
3.3 Flushness Tolerances - Suitable gauge shall be used for measuring the head flushness.
the head flushness with respect to the metal skin line shall be as specified in 3.2.
The tolerances
for
4. Identification
4.1 The rivets shall be marked
Alloy No.
on the head or on the end of the shank with symbols
as indicated:
Identification Symbol
0.8mm
max.
Indented
.oi
0.8mm
max.
Indented
4.2 The symbols

5. Designation -
58
shall have a depth of approximately

Shall be designated
0.2 mm.
by the rivet diameter,
material alloy number and number of this standard.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERSAPART
1s : 9093 - 1979
Example:
A 100 countersunk
rivet of diameter
Standard shall be designated as:
6.4 mm, material alloy No. 2 and conforming
Rivet 6.4 Alloy 2 -
to this Indian
IS : 9093
6.1 The condition
of supply,
Alloy No.
heat treatment,
mechanical
Heat Treatment
by Rivet Maker
Before Delivery
Condition 88
Delivered
Annealed
None
properties
As manufactured
As manufactured
of the rivets shall be as given below:
Condition
at the Time
of Closing
Condition
When in Use
As delivered
As delivered
As closed
As closed
6.2 General requirements for rivets, if not specified in this specification,

for rivets of aluminium
and aluminium
wrought
7. Packing
8. Marking a)
b)
c)
d)
As agreed between the purchaser

All packages
shall be marked
and the supplier.
with the following
Manufacturers
name or trade-mark,
Rivet designation,
Quantity, and
Particulars of Inspector or Inspectors
8.1 Z,SZCertification Marking -
shall be as specified in IS : 9089-1979

alloys for aircraft*.
Details available
EXPLANATORY
information:
stamp.
with the Indian
Standards
Institution.
NOTE
This standard is one of the series of standards on aircraft rivets. In the preparation
of this standard,
assistance has been derived from SP 87 and SP 88-1959 loo0 countersunk head high nickel-copper alloy rivets
issued by the British Standards Institution. This standard generally conforms to ISO/DIS 3229 Aircraft-Nickel
alloy rivets-Basic
dimensions, materials and identification symbols, issued by the International
Organization
for Standardization
(ISO).
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
59
SECTION B
Pins
Indian
Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR SPLIT PINS
( Second
1. Scope
Prescribes
requirements
ReviSion )
size 0.6 to 20 mm.
for split pins of nominal
2. Nomenclature
2.1 Nominal Length (l) - The nominal
short leg (see also Appendix A)
2.2 Nominal Size -
The nominal
length is the distance from underside
size is the diameter
of the eye to the extreme end of the
of the hole for receiving
the split pins.
3. Dimensions
3.1 The dimensions
3.2 The preferred
length-size
3.3 The permissible

4. Material -
of the split pins shall be as given in Table 1.

combinations
tolerances
shall be as given in Table 2.
on the dimensions
Unless otherwise
specified,
shall be as indicated
in Table
split pins shall be manufactured
1.
from half round
mild steel wires.
5. Finish - Split pins shall be supplied with bright selfcolour finish, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser.
The end of each leg may be square or bevelled as shotin in figure given in Table I at the option of the
manufacturer
and shall be free from burrs.
6. Designation
6.1 A split pin shall be designated
(for other than steel only).
Example 1:
A split pin of nominal
Example 2:
A spltt pm of nominal
7. Shank -
by the nominal
length, the number of this standard
and material
size 5, nominal length 50 mm and made of steel, shall be designated

Split Pin 5 X 50 - IS : 549
size 10, nominal length 80 mm and made of brass, shall be designated
Split Pin 10 X 80 - IS : 549 - Brass
The shank shall be straight
8. Sampling - Sampling
threaded fasteners.
size, nominal
and acceptance
with both legs parallel

criteria shall conform
throughout
the nominal
as:
as:
length.
to IS : 6821-1973 Methods for sampling
non-
9. Test - The samples selected for test, when cold, shall permit half the length of both the legs being bent back
through l&O0 and closed flat upon themselves without showing any sign of fracture.
10. Packing -
Split pins shall be packed in cartons

Nominal Diatneler
M?n
Up to and including
2.5, 3.2 and 4
5 and 6.3
8 and IO
13, 16 and 20
Packages
and/or
wooden
FASTENERS-PART
as specified below:
Quanfity in
Each Carton/ Wooden Box
(Numbers)
1000
500
200
100
50
shall be made in such a way that they are protected
I-IANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL
boxes with quantity
against
mechanical
damage
in transit.
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
OF SPLIT
PINS
( CIuuses 3.1 and 3.3 )

.Ali dimenstons
in millimetres.
Min
b
1 a
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.6
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.4
3.2
6.4
Max
I .4
1.8
2.8
3.6
4.6
5.8>
1.4
9.2
Il.8
Mitl
0.9
1.2
1.6
1.7
2.4
3.2
5.1
6.5
10.3
IO
12.6
il
39
23
29
* For railway applications
and in cases where split pins in clevis pins are subjected to alternating
transverse
forces, it is recommended
to use the next large
split pin size to that specified in the above table.
IS : 549.- 1974
TABLE
PREFERRED
LENGTH-SIZE
COMBINATION
( Clause 3.2 )
All dimensions
Note -
in millimetres.
Sizes between the bold lines are preferred.
11. earking - Each carton shall be labelled with the manufacturers

of contents, particulars of quantity and size of split pins.
11.1 ISZ Certification Marking -
Details available
name or initials or trade-mark,
with the Indian
APPENDIX
Standards
description
Institution,
( CZause 2.1 )
SPLIT
A-l. Length Gauge below:
PIN LENGTH
GAUGE
The lengths of the split pins may be determined
PERMISSIBLE
BREAK
ON GAUGE 0.10
by means of a split pin gauge as illustrated
HOLE
I&t
I PIN
This standard is in full agreement in regard to dimensions with ISO/R

series, issued by the International
Organization
for Standardization.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
1234-1971 Split pins-Metric
65
IS -: 2393 - 19Ii-h
--1_1
__--
r-Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR CYLINDRICAL
PINS
( Second Revision )
1. Scope -
Covers the requirements
2. Dimensions
for unhardened
cylindrical
pins in the diameter
range 1.5 to 50 mm.
and Tolerances
2.1 The dimensions and tolerances

combinations
as in Table 2.
2.2 The ends of the cylindrical
for cylindrical
pins shall be as given in Table 1 and preferred length-diametet
pins shall be as specified in Table

TABLE 1
1.
DIMENSIONS FOR CYLINDRICAL

( clauses 2.1, 2.2 and 5. I )
PINS
Odh8-
---
--A
a--l-L-
---b-C
All
d m6/h8/hll
Nom
1.5
2.5
-4-L-C
C-4-L
dimensions in millimetres.
EJ
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.63
0.8
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.5
0.63
0.8
1.2
1.6
10
12
1.2
2
16
20
25
30
40
50
1.6
2.5
6.3
2.5
3.5
6.3
3. Material - Cylindrical pins,conforming

to the standard shall be manufactured
from steel of grade C30 c
IS : 5517-1972 Specification for steels for hardening and tempering or any other suitable steel with a minimur
tensile strength of 500 N/mm*. At the request of purchaser, pins may also be supplied from free-cutting steel
conforming to IS : 443 l- 1978 Specification for carbon and carbon-manganese
free-cutting steels yirst revision)
4. Designation
4.1 Cylindrical
pinsshallbe designated
the number of this standard.
by name, nominal
diameter,
tolerance
on diameter,
nominal
length anI
Example:
A cylindrical pin of nominal
designated as:
diameter
Cylindrical
66
10 mm, tolerance
h8 and nominal
length 20 mm shall b
Pin 10 h8 X 20 IS : 2393
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :2393 - 1980
5. Workmanship
and Finish
5.1 All pins shall be fee from burrs, scales and tool marks. The surface finish of the various
shown in figures in Table 1.
faces shall be as
6. Packing
6.1 The pins may be packed in cartons or boxes in quantities
clearly indicated on the cartons or boxes.
of 10,20,50
or 100. The size and quantity
shall be
7. Marking
7.1 ISZ Certi$cation Marking -
TABLE
Details available
PREFERRED
with the Indian
LENGTH-DIAMETER
Standards
Institution.
COMBINATIONS
( Clause 2.1 )
All dimensions
Note 1 i
Note 2 -
in millimetres.
DIAMETER
Preferred lengths are between the stepped lines.

For lengths above 200 mm, steps of 20 mm may be used.
EXPLANATORY
NOTE
This standard was originally issued in 1963 and revised in 1972. In the revision of 1972, only unhardened
cylindrical pins were covered while requirements
of hardened cylindrical pins and taper pins are covered in
IS : 6689-1972 and IS : 6688-1972 respectively.
In the earlier version, tolerance values given after rounding off to the second place of decimal had posed
certain manufacturing
problems as the manufacturer
could not take advantage of the specified tolerance class
owing to the rounding off which restricted the actual tolerance available for manufacture.
Hence, tolerance
values have been deleted and only tolerance classes retained.
In the preparation
of this standard, assistance has been derived from IS0 2338-1972
unhardened
- metric series issued by International
Organization
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
Parallel
pins,
67
IS : 3524 (Part 1) - 1982

Indian
SPECIFICATION
Standard
FOR THREADED
PART
1 WITH
INTERNAL
/ First Revision
Scope 1 mm.
Dimensions
of threaded
TAPER
PINS
THREADS
)
taper pins with internal
threads
in the diameter
range 6 to
and Tolerances
1 The dimensions
2 The preferred
and tolerances
length-diameter
for internal
threaded
combinations
taper pins shall be as given in Table
for internal
threaded
1.
taper pins are given in Table 2.
3 The taper on the diameter of the taper pins shall be 1 : 50. The cone angle tolerance shall be AT8 for internal
neaded taper pins (see IS : 7615-1975 System of cone tolerances),
4 Screw threads on internal threaded taper pins shall conform to tolerance class 6H of IS : 4218 (Part 4)-1976
pecification for IS0 metric screw threads : Part 4 Tolerancing system (first revision).
Material ~- Threaded taper pins shall be manufactured
from steel with minimum tensile strength of
)O N / mm2 such as C30 of IS : 55 17-1978 Specification for steels for hardening and tempering Cfirst revisionjor
ee cutting steels conforming to IS : 4431-1978 Specification for carbon and carbon-manganese
free-cutting
eel Cfimt revision).
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
AND
TOLERANCES
FOR INTERNAL
THREADED
TAPER
PINS
( Clauses 2. I and 5 )
ENLARGED
DETAIL
AT X
I
Nom
Diameter
10
12
l4
16
20
25
30
40
u=
dz
d3
11
12 h4in
t3
68
50
I
d, MO
0.8
M4
4.3
I
M5
5.3
1.2
M6
6.4
1.6
M8
8.4
10
12
10
12
16
20
1.2
1.2
1.2
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 3524 (Part 1) - 1982

TABLE
PREFERRED
LENGTH-DIAMETER
COMBINATIONS
FOR INTERNAL
THREADED
TAPER
PINS
( Clause 2.2 )
All dimensions
in millimetres
NOMINAL
Note -
Preferred
lengths are between
4. Designation
- Threaded
number of standard.
the stepped
DIAMETER
dl
lines.
taper pins shall be designated
by name, nominal
diameter,
nominal
length and
Example:
An internal threaded
be designated as:
taper pin of nominal
Internal
Threaded
diameter,
dr = 12 mm and nominal
Taper Pin 12 8 80 -
length I= 80 mm shall
IS : 3524
5. Workmanship and Finish -Threaded

taper pins shall be free from burrs, scales and tool marks. The surface
finish of the various faces shall be as shown in figure in Table 1.
6. Sampling
and Acceptance
Criteria Unless otherwise agreed to between the purchaser
and the
manufacturer,
the method of sampling and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with IS : 2614-1969
Methods for sampling of fasteners (j&w revision) except the major and minor defects (see 6.1) and acceptable
quality levels (AQL) (see 6.2).
6.1 The major and minor defects shall be as given below:
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
69
IS : 3524 (Part 1) - 1982

6.2 The AQL values for testing for defectives
and defects shall be as given below:
A QJ- Values
Percent
Testing for Defectives
Testing for Defects
Major defect
Minor defect
1.5
1.5
7. General Requirements - As given in IS : 1367 (Part I)-1980 Technical supply conditions

fasteners:
Part 1 Introduction
7.1 For extraction
of internal
and general information
threaded taper pins, it is recommended
8. Packing - As given in IS : 1367 (Part 18)-1979 Technical

Part 18 Marking and mode of delivery (second revision).
9. ISI Certification
Marking
Details available
with the Indian
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Standards
for threaded
steel fasteners:
Institution.
NOTE
Threaded taper pins are used in application where frequent

The pins are threaded internal to provide easy withdrawal.
was first published
steel
that screws of property class 10.9areused.
supply conditions
EXPLANATORY
The standard
revision:
for threaded
(second revision)
dismounting
of the joined parts is required.
Standard has been split into two parts:

Part 1 Threaded taper pins with internal threads
Part 2 Threaded taper pins with external threads
Material clause has been modified to permit free-cutting steels with improved machinability.
Tolerance on the screw threads have been modified to align with IS : 4218 - 1976 Specification for
IS0 metric screw threads.
Tolerance on nominal length has been modified to js 15.
For acceptance criteria, major and minor defects have been redefined and AQL values incorporated.
AQL values are separately given for testing for defects and defectives. Thus either testing for
individual defects or defectives (the latter only distinguishes
between good and defective pieces
regardless of the various possible defects) is necessary depending on the use to which the pins are put
to. Both methods of acceptance on the basis of defect or defective pieces are therefore included as
option. There is no clear-cut statistical connection between the AQL values for individual defects and
AQL values for defective pieces.
. . _- ____
For taper tolerance, for concept of cone angle tolerance has been introduced as covered In IS : 7613 1975 System of cone tolerances.
Cylindrical
pins with internal
threads
are covered in IS : 10248- 1982.
In the preparation
of this standard, assistance has been derived from DIN 7977- 1977 Kegelstifte mlt
Gewindezapfen
und konstanten
Zapfenlangen
(Taper pins with thread and constant threaded part) and DIN
7978 - 1977 Kegelstifte mit Innengewinde
(Taper pins with internal thread), issued by the Deutsches Institut fi.ir
Normung.
7n
HANDBOOK
ON JNDUSTRJAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 3524 (Part 2) - 1982

-
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR THREADED
PART 2 WITH EXTERNAL
TAPER
PINS
THREADS
/ First Revision )
1. Scope 50 mm.
2. Dimensions
of threaded
taper pins with external
threads in the diameter
range 5 to
and Tolerances
2.1 The dimensions

2.2 -The preferred
and tolerances
length-diameter
for external
threaded
combinations
taper pins shall be as given in Table
for external
threaded
taper pins arc given in Table 2.
of taper pins shall be 1 : SO. The cone angle tolerance
2.3 The taper on the diameter

threaded taper pins.
1.
shall be AT 10 for external
2.4 Screw threads on external threaded taper pins shall conform to tolerance class 6g of IS : 42 18 (Part 4)-l 976
Specification for IS0 metric screw threads : Part 4 Tolerancing
system (first revision).
3. Material
- Threaded taper pins shall be manufactured

from steel with minimum tensile strength of
500 N/ mm2 such as C30 of IS : 55 I7- 1978 Specification for steels for hardening and tempering Cfirst revision) or
free cutting steels conforming to IS : 4431-1978 Specification for carbon and carbon-manganese
free-cutting
tee1 (first reikion).
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
AND
TOLERANCES
All dimensions
REMOVE
SHARP
FOR
EXTERNAL
THREAD
EDGE
THREADED
TAPER
PINS
in millimetres.
END
TO
HDP
ACCORDING
1s:1+
Y-
N 11
d
Nom Diw
14
18
22
4.5
5.3
M6
M8
MI0
1
10
12
14
16
20
25
30
40
50
24
21
30
35
35
40
46
58
70
1.5
10.5
12
Ml2
Ml2
Ml6
Ml6
M20
M24
M30
M36
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.5
2.5
d, h10
+ 2P
b
a Max
dz
r2 Note -
2.4
M5
0.6
A chamfer
0.6
be provided
0.6
on the bigger end of the taper to about
1 mm length.
_____-.._
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
71
IS : 3524
(Part
TABLE 2
2) - 1982
PREFERRED
LENGTH-DIAMETER
COMBINATIONS
FOR EXTERNAL
THREADED
TAPER
PINS
( Clause 2.2 )
All dimensions
in millimetres.
NOMINAL
DIAMETER
dl
Note 1 -. For lengths beyond 360 mm, steps of 40 mm may be used.

Note 2 - Preferred lengths are between the stepped lines.
4. Designation
number
- Threaded
of standard.
taper pins shall be designated
by name, nominal
diameter,
nominal
length and
Example:
An external threaded taper pin of nominal
be designated as:
External
Threaded
diameter, do = 10 mm and nominal
Taper Pin 10 X 100 -
length I= 100 mmshall
IS : 3524 (Part 2)
5. Workmanship and Finish - Threaded taper pins shall be free from burrs, scales and tool marks. The surface
finish of the various faces shall be as shown in figure in Table 1.
6. Sampling
and Acceptance
Criteria Unless otherwise agreed to between the purchaser
and the
manufacturer,
the method of sampling and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with IS : 2614-1969
Methods for sampling of fasteners Cfirst revision) except the major and minor defects (see 6.1) and acceptable
quality levels (AQL) (see 6.2).
6.1 The major and minor defects shall be as given below:
Minor Defect
Major Defect
Nominal
diameter,
d,
Nominal
Thread
Taper
Thread
limits
length, I
length, b
Surface finish
6.2 The AQL values for testing for defectives
and defects shall be as given below:
A QL Values, Percent
Testing for Defectives
Testing for Defects

1 Maior defect
Minor defect
12
1.5
1.5
4
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
I
I
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 3524 (Part 2) -1982

7. General Requirelnents - As given in IS : I367 (Part 1)-1980 Technical supply conditions
fasteners: Part 1 Introduction
and general information
(second revision).
8. Packing
AS given in IS : 1367 (Part lSj-1979 Technical
Part 18 Marking and mode of delivery (second revision).
9. IS1 Certification
Marking -
Details
available
supply conditions
with the Indian
EXPLANATORY
was first published
for threaded
steel
steel fasteners:
Institution.
NOTE
Threaded taper pins are used in applications where frequent

The pins are threaded external to provide easy withdrawal.
The standard
Standards
for threaded
dismounting
of the joined parts is required.
revision:
a)
The standard
has been split into two parts:
Part 1 Threaded
Part 2 Threaded
taper pins with internal threads

taper pins with external threads
b)
Material
c)
Tolerance
threads.
d)
Thread end of taperpinswith external

threads has been referred to lS : 1368 - 1980 Dimensions
ends of bolts and screws (second revision).
e)
Tolerance
f)
For acceptance criteria, major and minor defects have been redefined and AQL values incorporated.
AQL values are separately given for testing for defects and defectives. Thus either testing for
individual
defects or defectives (the latter only distinguishes
between good and defective pieces
regardless of the various possible defects) is necessary depending on the use to which the pins are put
to. Both methods of acceptance on the basis of defects or defective pieces are therefore included as
option. There is no clear-cut statistical connection between the AQL values for individual defects and
AQL values for defective pieces.
g)
For taper tolerance, the concept of cone angle tolerance

1975 System of cone tolerances.
Cylindrical
threads.
clause has been modified

on the screw threads
on nominal
to permit
free-cutting
have been modified
length has been modified
pins with internal
threads
are covered
steels with improved
machinability.
to align with IS : 4218 - 1976 IS0 metric screw

for
to js 15.
has been introduced
as covered in IS : 7615
in IS : 10248- 1982 Cylindrical
pins with internal
In the nreparation
of the standard, assistance has been derived from DIN 7977-1977 Kegelstifte mit
Gewindezapfen
und konstanten
Zapfenlangen
(Taper pins with thread and constant threaded part) and DIN
7978-1977 Kegelstifte mit Innengewinde
(Taper pins with internal thread), issued by the Deutsches lnstitut fiir
Normung.
HANDBOOKONINDUSTRIALFASTENERS-PART3
73
1s :4981- 1984
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
GUIDE PJNS FOR FOUNDRY PATTERN
( Second Revision )
PLATES
0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard (Second Revision) was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 31 May 1984,
after the draft finalized by the Foundary Sectional Committee had been approved by the Structural and Metals
Division Council.
0.2 This standard was first issued in 1968 and was subsequently
revised in 1975. On the basis of experience
gained during these years, it has been decided to revise this standard to make it more practicable. In this revision,
the material requirement and dimensions of the guide pins have been modified.
0.3 Guide pins are fixed in the pin holes of the pattern plate by means of washers, spring washers, nuts or lock
nuts to superimpose the moulding boxes.
IS: 2-1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant places retained in the
rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
1. Scope
1.1 This standard
covers the requirements
for guide pins for foundry
pattern
plates.
2. Supply of Material
2.1 General
requirements
requirements
relating to the supply of guide pins shall conform
materials (first revision).
to IS : 1387-1967 General
3. Material
3.1 (;uidc pins shall be machined from steel conforming to class I A of IS : 1875 and shall be case carborized,
hardened and tempered to 40 45 HRC and the case depth shall be maintained at 0.25 mm. Min.
3.1.1 Higher hardness of the pin may also be supplied if agreed to between the manufacturer
and the user.
4. Shape and Size

4.1 The shape and sizes of guide pins shall be in accordance
with Tables
I and 2
5. Screw Threads
5.1 As indicated in the figures given in Tables I and 2, the left-hand end of the pin shall be threaded. The threads
shall conform to IS : 4218 (Part 3)-1976 IS0 metric screw threads : Part 3 Basic dimensions fordesign profile
(/ir.sr re\~i.sion).
6. Designation
6.1 Guide pin (A) for round holes shall be designated by the nominal diameter(dl) and nominal length (11)of the
pin. For example, a guide pin of nominal diameter 22 mm and nominal length 135 mm shall be designated as
guide pin (A) 22 X 135 -- IS : 4981.
6.2 Guide pin (B) for elongated bush holes shall be designated by the nominal width across flat (br) and nominal
length (I,) of the pin. For example, a guide nin of nominal width across flat 22 mm and nominal length 175 mm
shall be designated as guide pin (B) 22 X 175 -. IS : ~$981.
7. Workmanship
and Finish
7.1 All guide pins shall be made cleanly and neatly and shall be free from burrs, scales and tool marks.
8. Packing
8.1 The guide pins may be packed in cartons or boxes with a coating of suitable rust preventive,
IO, 20, 50 or 100. The size and quantity shall be clearly indicated on the cartons or boxes.
13
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
in quantities
FASTENERS-PART
of
IS : 4981- 1984
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
OF GUIDE
PINS (A) FOR PATTERN PLATES

MOULDING
BOXES
( cl0uses 4. I and 5.I )
All dimensions
1HlS
FACE
TO GUIDE
ROUND
BUSH HOLES
OF
in millimetres.
SHALL
BE
TAPER
NT/
.!y
SQUARE
TO
THE
AXIS
OF
PIN
1 IN 10
Guide Pin (A) Dimensions

A
r
d,
(dIO*)
d>
d3
d,
hl
(h13*)
I,
12
Ii
(h8*)
19
19
16
30
24
130
22
25
22
22
20
32
27
135
22
30
25
25
24
36
32
150
27
36
30
30
24
40
36
150
32
36
Size of Pattern Plate

mmXmm
From
to
From
to
From I
to
I
From I
to 2
Note -- These guide pins though recommended for round bush holes may also be used for elongated bush holes of moulding
discretion of the purchaser.
*Deviations in accordance with IS : 919-1963 Recommendations
for limits and fits for engineering (revi.trd).
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
OF GUIDE PINS (B) FOR PATTERN PLATES

BUSH HOLES OF MOULDING BOXES
TO GUIDE
345 X
660 X
750 X
345
660
440
1040x 1040
170
450
650
050
X
x I
X
x 2
680
450
950
050
boxes at the
ELONGATED
( Clauses 4. I and 5. I )
All dimensions
-THIS
FACE
SHALL
in millimetrcs
BE
SQUARE
TAPER
TO
THE
AXIS
OF
PIN
1 IN 10,
l-4
i
-..-+d2-.-
---..
- ---_d?.dt._---____
N5 =04um
N7=I.tkm
11
Guide Pins (B) Dimensions

A
I
bl
(dlO*)
dj
(hll*)
dz
d,
da
bz
1
II
12
(h13)
(h8*)
I9
22
I9
16
30
24
170
22
25
22
25
22
20
32
27
175
22
30
25
28
25
24
36
32
190
27
36
30
34
30
24
40
36
190
32
36
*Deviations
in accordance
HANDBOOK
with IS
ON INDUSTRIAl>
Size of Pattern Plate

mmXmm
: 919-1963 Recommendations
FASTENERS--PAR1
for limits and fits for engineering
From
to
From
to
From I
to
I
From
to 2
345 X 345
660
660 x
750 X 440
104cx1040
170 X 6SO
450 x I 450
650 X 950
050 x 2 050
(revised)
75
IS : 4981- 1984
9. Marking
9.1 The cartons or boxes containing
manufacturers
name or trade-mark.
9.1.1 The cartons
the guide pins shall be suitably
or boxes containing
marked to indicate size, quantity
the guide pins may also be marked with the 1551Certification
and the
Mark.
Note - The use of the ISI Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards Institution (Certification Marks)
Act and the Ruls and Regulations made thereunder. The IS1 Mark on products covered by an lndian Standard conveys the assurance that
they have been produced to comply with the requirements of that standard under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and quality
control which is devised and supervised by IS1 and operated by the producer. ISI marked products are also continuously checked by IS1 for
conformity to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions, under which a licence for the use of the ISI Certification Mark may
be granted to manufacturers
HANDBOOK
ON INDLiSTRIAI,
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 6401- 1971
Indian Standard
DOWEL
1. Scope -Covers
the requirements
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PINS FOR USE IN FOUNDRIES
for dowel pins for locating and securing split patterns core boxes and dies in
foundries.
2. Dimensions
-- Shapes and sizes of dowel pins and sockets
TABLE
of a dowel pin of outside diameter
in millimetres.
d, = IO mm:
Insert Dowel I-10 IS
Designation
of a socket of outside diameter
of a complete
I-10 IS
Insert Dowel with Socket
HANDBOOK
ON INDt:STRIAI,
: 6401
dowel pin with socket of outside diameter
Note --- The depth of recess of grooves
: 6401
dl = 10 mm:
Socket
Designation
dl = 10 mm:
I-10 IS
: 6401
shall not be more than half of the thickness
FASTENERS-PART
I to 4.
TYPE 1 DOWEL WITH SOCKET
All dimensions
Designation
shall be as specified in Tables
of socket.
77
IS :6401- 1971
TABLE
TYPE 2 PLATE
DOWEL
AND SOCKET
WITHOUT
FAUCET
( Clause 2 )
All dimensions
PLATE
d,
a2
62
30
36
42
4
5
6
5
6
8
OOWEL WITHOUT
12
15
18
FAUCET
22
26
32
in millimetres.
(VI
SOCKET
WiTHOUT
PLATE
FAUCET
d,
L4
Fixing with Three

Countersunk
Head
Wood Screws
Screw Designation
(see 3.1 of
IS : 451-1961*)
3.1
4.3
4.8
19
25
31
7
8
9
Designation
of a plate dowel without
faucet of diameter d, = 36 mm:

Plate Dowel 2-36 IS
*
: 6401
Designation
of a socket plate without
faucet of diameter da = 36 mm:

Socket Plate 2-36 IS
: 6401
Designation
*Specification
of a complete
plate dowel with socket plate, both without faucet of diameter

Plate Dowel with Socket Plate 2-36 IS : 6401
d, = 36 mm:
for wood screws (revised).
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 6401- 1971
TABLE 3
TYPE 3 PLATE DOWEL AND SOCKET WITH FAUCET

( Cbuse 2 )
All dimensions
in millimetres.
EDGE ROUNDED
ds
u3
bs
ds
dm
dll
du
LS
L6
L7
Fixing with Three

Countersunk Head
Wood Screws.
Screw Designation
(see 3.1 of
IS : 451-1961)
42
52
65
6
8
10
8
10
13
18
23
30
32
40
50
4.8
5.3
5.8
24
30
38
8
II
14
39
50
64
14
19
24
9
10
12
Designationof
a plate dowel with faucet of dtameter
dg = 52 mm:
Plate Dowel 3-52 IS
: 6401
Designation
of a socket plate with faucet of diameter & = 52 mm:

Socket Plate 3-52 IS : 6401
D,esignation
of a complete
HANDBOOK
OR fNDUSTRTAL
plate dowel with socket plate of diameter do = 52 mm:

Plate Dowel with Socket 3-52 IS : 6401
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 6401- 1971
TABLE
TYPE 4 DOWEL
WITH SOCKET FOR METAL

( Clause 2 )
All dimensions
to IS
: 1369-1961 Dimensions
of screw thread
: 1368-1967 Dimensions
to IS
run outs and undercuts.

Short
Dowel
of ends of bolts and screws.

From L -
du
SOCKET
W(V)
Form K 21 is according
AND DIES
in millimetres.
SOCKET OOWEL OR LONG DOWEL
XI is according
CORE BOXES
dir
Long Dowel
L9
LB
d16
LIO
Form
K
Form
L
LII
Form
K
Form
L
Ml0
15
10
12
I5
30
50
65
Ml2
18
12
16
20
40
60
80
24
16
20
25
50
80
105
28
20
25
30
60
100
130
10
18
Ml6
30
Designation
of a short dowel for metal core boxes and dies of diameter dll = 12 mm:
Short Dowel 5-12 IS :-6401
Designation
of a short dowel with socket of diameter

Short
Designation
dlj = 12 mm:
Dowel with Socket 4-12 IS
of a socket for metal core boxes and dies of diameter
: 6401
dlj = I2 mm:
Socket 4-12 IS : 6401

(Continued)
IS :6401- 1971
TABLE
TYPE 4 DOWEL
WITH
SOCKET
FOR METAL
All dimensions
CORE BOXES
AND DIES-Conrd
in millimetres.
CSK
ES
No. 1
Burh
Bush No. 2
\!
I
--ii
Combi-
I2
l-l
38
12
l-2
46
I6
1-3
50
I6
nation*
I----Bush No. 4
Bush No. !I
(VI
l-4
52
I6
2-I
38
IO
20
2-2
46
I2
24
2-3
52
I2
26
2-4
56
I6
28
*These indicate
HANDBOOK
guide pin and bush combinations.
ON INDISTRIAI.
FASTENERS--FART
IS : 6401 - 1971
TABLE
TYPE 4 DOWEL
WITH
SOCKET
FOR METAL
All dimensions
Guide Pin No.
Combination*
d,
dz
1-I
1-2
1-3
1-4
2-l
2-2
2-3
2-4
12
16
20
22
12
16
20
22
8
12
14
16
10
12
16
16
M6
Ml0
Ml2
Ml4
M8
MI0
Ml4
Ml4
*These indicate
AND DIES-Conrd
in millimetres.
17.5
20
26
26
CORE BOXES
Guide Pin No. 2
18
22
25
30
18
22
25
30
I3
I4
IO
14
18
18
10
14
18
I8
12
16
20
20
12
16
20
20
22
30
35
38
22
30
35
38
4
4
5
5
8
11
14
17
8
11
14
17
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
guide pin and bush combinations.
3. Material
3.1 The material
ground.
for pins and bushes shall be low carbon steel and the guide portions
shall be case hardened
and
4. General
4.1 The rounding
of the dowel shall be subject to the manufacturers
choice.
5. Tolerances
5.1 Coarse class IS : 2102-1969 Recommendations
tolerances.
for machining
deviations
for dimensions
without specified
6. Supply
6.1 According
7. Marking -
to IS : 1387- 1967 General requirements
materials first
revision).
Mark with the following:
a) Designation,
and
b) Name or trade-mark
82
Marking
of the manufacturer.
-
Details available
with the Indian
Standards
HANDBOOK
Institution.
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 6688 - 1981
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR TAPER
( Firsr Revision )
1. Scope -
2. Types -
Taper pins shall be of three types:
range of 0.6 to 50 mm
Pins that are ground with a surface finish N6 (see IS : 4290-1968 Specification
comparison
specimens)
Pins that are turned with a surface finish N7 (see IS : 4290-1968)
Split taper pins with a surface finish N7 (see IS : 4290-1968).
Type A Type B Type C -
3. Dimensions
for taper pins in the diameter
PINS
for roughness
and Tolerances
3.1 The dimensions
for taper pins shall be as given in Table 1.
and tolerances
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR TAPER PINS

( Clauses 3. I and 6 )
r-_,d
rssd
TAPER I:50
rzd
rrd
&
TAPER 1:50
-
-a
-c-a
I
TYPE A
TYPE B
r-d
rcrd
1
@d
-AC
I
a ---
TAPER
-1:50
1
\
-
c=o*21
1
TYPE C
,
d h10 Nom
as
0.6 / 0.8
,
! 0.08: 0.1
2.5; 3 I4
1
5
i6
; 8 i 10 5 12 7; 16 20 1 25
0
il.2
/I.5
2
t
4
/
3
/ 0.16j 0.2 0.251 0.3, 0.4 j 0.5 j 0.63 i 0.8 / I j 1.2 1.6 j 2 ; 2.5
1
0.12
30
40
50
3.2 The taper on the taper pins shall be I : 50. The cone angle tolerance shall be AT8 for Type A pins and ATlO
for Types B and C pins in accordance with IS : 7615-1975 Specification for system of cone tolerance. Angle
tolerance AT8 and AT!0 shall be applied on taper pins with nominal length greater than 6 mm.
__----__.-
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
83
IS : 6688 - 1981
3.3. The preferred
length-diameter
TABLE
combinations
PREFERRED
LENGTH-DIAMETER
All dimensions
COMBINATIONS
75
Note I
Note 2
.
I
PINS
in inillimetres.
DIAMETER
FOR TAPER
I.1
For lengths beyond 200 mm. steps of 20 mm may be used.

ured from steel C 30 of IS : 5517-1978 Steels for

or any other suuable steel with a minimum tensile strength of 500 N/mm2. At the
request ot the purchaser, free cutting steels conforming to IS : 443 I-1978 Specification for carbon and carbor
manganese free-cutting steel (firer revision), may also be used for manufacture.
84
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRlAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 6688 - 1981
5. Designation
and number
- Taper pins shall be designated

of the standard.
by name, type (A, B or C), nominal
diameter,
nominal
length,
Examples:
A taper pin of Type A of nominal
diameter
10 mm and nominal
length 50 mm shall be designated
Taper Pin A 10 X 50 IS : 6688

A split taper pin (Type C) of nominal diameter 20 mm and nominal
as:
as:
Split Taper Pin C 20 X 60 IS : 6688

6. Workmanship and Finish - All pins shall be free from burrs, scales and tool marks. The surface finish of the
various faces shall be as shown in Table 1.
7. Packing -The pins shall be packed in cartons or boxes in quantities
shall be clearly indicated on the cartons or boxes.
Marking -
Details available
with the Indian
EXPLANATORY
This standard was first published
line with IS0 2339-1974. The following
of 10,20,50 or 100. The size and quantity
Standards
Institution.
NOTE
in 1972. A revision has been necessitated

major changes have been madt:
for bringing
a)
The concept of cone angle tolerance has been brought instead of taper tolerance
cone angle tolerance as elaborated in IS : 7615-1975 also includes straightness
permissible limits of the cone taper.
b)
The method
c)
Nominal
added.
RANDBOOK
of representation
diameters
ON INDUSTRIAL,
0.6,0.8,
of the surface roughness
in
specified earlier. The

tolerance within the
value has been modified.
1 and 1.2 mm and, correspondingly,
FASTENERS-PART
the standard
lengths 2,3,4,5
and 6 mm have been
85
IS : 6689- 1972
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
HARDENED
CYLINDRICAL
1. Scope
-- Covers the requirements
for hardened
2. Dimensions - The dimensions and tolerance

combinations
shall be as given in Table I.
3. Material - Hardened
strength of 600 MN/ mz.
pins covered
cylindrical
of hardened
in this standard
and the number
~~~The harden:d cylindrical

of the standard.
pins in the diameter

cylindrical
range 1.5 to 20 mm.
pins and preferred
length-diameter
shall be made from steel having a minimum
4. Hardness -- 700 + 50HV [ see IS : 1501-1968Method

5. Designation
PINS
for Vickers hardness
pins shall be designated
tensile
test for steel (first revision)].
by the nominal diameter, the nominal
length
Example:
A hardened
as:
cylindiical
pin of nominal
Hardened
6. Workmanship
diameter
4 mm and nominal
Pin 4 X 20 IS : 6689
and Finish
6.1 All pins shall be manufactured

figure in Table 1.
free from burrs, scales and tool marks. The surface fmish shall be as shown in
7. Packing
7.1 The pins may be packed in cartons or boxes in quantities
clearly indicated in the cartons or boxes.
86
Marking -
Details available
of 10,25, 50 or 100. The size and quantity
with the Indian
Standards
HANDBOOK
shall be
Institution.
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :6689
- 1972
s.
TABLE 1
DIMENSIONS FOR HARDENED

( Clauses 2 and 6.1 )
CYLINDRICAL
PINS
rlP
2*5
WITHOUT
BURR
1.5
10
12
16
20
1.506 2'006 2.506 3.006 'L.012 5.012 6.012 8.015 10.015 12.01616*01620.021
1.502 2.002 2-502. 3.002 2*004 5.0db PO04 6.006 10406 12.007 16.00720.008
L
0.23
0*12
)
1
0.3 1 O*L 1 O-45 1 0.6

048
1 0.251
1 0.75 1
0.9 1 1.2
I
1.5
0.3 1 0.2 ) O-5 1 0*6 ) 0.6 1 1
12
1.6
16
20
2.5
1.3
I.7
1
js 15
4
ii
8
10
12
16
16
E
30
35
.a
L5
50
55
60
65
70
75
80.
90
100
110
120
130
1LO
150
160
170
180
190
200
Note 1 Note 2-
I
i
For lengths beyond 200 mm steps of 20 mm may be used.

EXPLANATORY
NOTE
In this stfindard, hardened pins in the diameter range 1.5 to 20 mm have been covered. Unhardened
cylindrical pins are covered in IS : 2393-1980 Specification for cylindrical pins (second revision).
HANDBOOKONINDIJSTRIALFASTENERS-PART3
87
IS : 6862 - 1981
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR CLEVIS PINS
( First Revision )
1. Scope -
2. Types -
Clevis pins shall be of two types:
Type A Type B -
for clevis pins in the diameter
Clevis pins without split pinholes,

Clevis pins with split pinholes.
range 3 to 100 mm.
and
3. Dimensions
3.1 The dimensions
and tolerances
TABLE.1
for the clevis pins shall be as given
DIMENSIONS
AND TOLERANCES
All dimensions
TYPE
SPLIT
in Table
FOR CLEVIS
1.
PINS
in millimetres.
TYPE
A WITHOUT
PIN HOLES
B WITH SPLIT
PIN HOLES
*Recommended
tolerances al I cl I, f8, hll.
712, clamping length, to be specified by the purchaser (see 5.1).
$Hole diameter d, = nominal size of the split pin [see IS : 549-1974Specitication
for split pins (second revisionh. For
railway applications_and in cases where the split pins are subjected to alternating transverse forces, it is recommended to use
the next larger split pin and corresponding
hole diameter to that specified.
88
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
km-
IS : 6862; 1981
3.2 The Preferred Lengrh-Diameter
TABLE 2
PREFERRED
combinations
_ -___
shall be as given in Table
LENGTH-DIAMETER
2.
COMBINATIONS FOR CLEVIS PINS
Note 1 - Preferred lengths are shown between stepped bola nnes.

Note 2 -
For lengths above 300 mm, use steps of 20 mm.
4. Material - Clevis pins, conforming to this standard, shall conform to C30 of IS : 55 17-1978 Specification for
steels for hardening and tempering Cfirst rivision) or any suitable steel with a minimum tensile strength of 500
N/mm*. At the request of purchaser, clevis pins may also be supplied from free-cutting steels conforming to IS :
443 1: J978 Soecification for carbon and carbon-manganese
free-cutting steel Cfirst revision).
_.___-..-_
-HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART
89
--__.
.._
..
IS : 6&2 -3 1981
5. Designation - Clevis pins shall be designated by the type, nominal size, togrance on diameter and nominal
length. In the case of Type B clevis pins, the clamping length, 12 shall be ad$ed after the nominal length.
Example:
A clevis pin of Type A, nominal
designated as:
sized, = 10 mm, tolerance
h 11 on diameter and length 30 mm shall be
Clevis Pin AlOh 11 X 30 IS : 6862

5.1 For a clevis pin of Type B, the total length I is arrived at by adding the dimension 12(the desired clamping
length), dz (hole diameter), and 2 I,. The minimum dimension 1, calculated thus, shall be rounded off to the next
higher standard length 1 as given in Table 2.
Example:
For a clevis pin of Type B, nominal size dl = 20 mm, tolerance h 11 on diameter, clamping length 60
mm, the total length shall work out as 81 mm. Therefore, a clevis pin of 85 mm total length shall be
selected from Table 2. The designation shall then be as follows:
Clevis Pin B20hll
X 85 X 60 IS : 6862
Note - It is obvious that the dimension II will increase corresponding
to the increase
in the total length, I.
6.1 The pin surface shall be smooth, free from serrations,
marks shall be permissible.
die marks, deep scratches, etc, although
6.2 The pin shall be free from imperfect
edges, burrs, rust and pit marks,
threaded fasteners.
criteria shall conform
8. Packing
and acceptance
Pins shall be packed in suitable
to IS : 6821-1973 Methods for sampling
Marking
non-
cartons.
9. Marking - Cartons shall be marked with the name of the manufacturer

nominal size, type and the quantity of pins.
9.1 JSI Certification
slight free roll
Details available
with the Indian
EXPLANATORY
Standards
or initials or trade-mark,
if any,
Institution.
NOTE
This standard was first published in 1973. In the earlier version, the method of specifying the clamping
length for Type B clevis pins (the outer distance between the split pin holes) was 3ot clearly spelt out. The method
of arriving at the total length of the clevis pin from the required clamping length has been included in the present
revision and consequent changes have been made in the designation of clevis pins. The nominal length of the pin
has been increased to 300 mm. Reference has also been made to the relevant Indian Standard for sampling and
acceptance criteria for clevis pins.
Clevis ,pins with head are covered
In the preparation
90
of the standard,
Clevis
in IS : 6863-1973.
assistance
has been derived from the following
a)
IS0 2340-1972
Standardization.
pins-Metric
b)
DIN 1443-1974 Bolzen ohne Kopf-Mape

Deutsches Instiut fiir Normung.
series issued
by the
International
nach IS0 (Clevis pins without
HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL
publications:
Organization
for
head) issued by the
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 6863 - 1973
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
1. Scope
2. Types -

Clevis pins with head
FOR CLEVIS
PINS WITH HEAD
of clevis pins with head.

shall be of the following
Type A -
Clevis pin with head but without
Type B -
Clevis pin with head and split pin holes.
types:
split pin holes.
3. Dimensions
3.1 The dimensions
of the pins shall be as given in Table
TABLE 1
I.
OF CLEWS
PINS WITH HEAD (TYPE A AND B)
DIMENSIONS
BREAK
TYPE A WITHOUT
SPLIT
ldt
PIN
TYPE
EDGES
B WITH SPLlT
PIN HOLE
HOLE
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
10
14
18
20
36
22
25
28
30
33
tdzH13
0.8
1.2
1.6
3.2
3.2
6.3
c Max
e=
0.5
0.5
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
4.5
5.5
II Min
1.6
2.2
2.9
3.2
3.5
4.5
5.5
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
*dl
27
30
33
36
40
45
50
55
60
70
80
90
100
40
44
47
50
55
60
66
72
78
90
100
110
120
tdlH13
6.3
IO
10
10
10
c Max
e?
II
II Min
10
10
10
10
12
12
14
*Recommended
tHo]e diameter
applications
tolyance al I. cl 1, fg. hl 1.
& = nominal size of the split pin (see IS
and in cases where split pin is subjected to alternating
corresponding
hole diameter
to that specified.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
14
16
16
16
16
.I2
: 549-1961) Specification
transverse
13
for SplitcotterPins ( revised)'.

FOr railway
forces, it is recommended
to use the next larger Pin and
-.
FASTENERS-PART
91
Is ifirrd.3- 1973
3.2 The preferred
length-diameter
combinations

l
TABLE2
PREFERREDLENGTH-DIAMETERCOMBINATIONSFORCLEVISPINSWITHHEAD
Alldimensions
190 1
200 I
[
1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Note 1 - Nominal length in parenthesis
should
I
1
be avoided,
in millimetrks.
if possible.
Note 2 ~ For length between 200and 300 mm, use steps of IO mm; above 300mm, use steps of 20 mm
3.3 The tolerances
on the dimensions
1.
4. Mechanical RequirementsClevis pins with head shall generally be manufactured

from steel conforming
C40 of IS : 1570-1961 Schedule for wrought steels for general engineering purposes.
5. Finish
92
Pins shall be supplied
in natural
finish, unless otherwise
stated by the purchaser.
to
IS :6863
- 1973
6. Designation - Clevis pins with head shall be designated by the type, nominal size, tolerance on diameter and
length. In case of Type B clevis pins, the length from the underside of head to centre of split pin hole should be
specified after the nominal length.
Example
I:
Clevis pin with head and without split pin hole (Type A) of nominal
cl I on diameter and length 30 mm shall be designated as:
Clevis Pin A10 Example
cl 1 X 30 -
size 10 mm, with a tolerance
of
IS : 6863
2:
Clevis pin with head and split pin holes (Type B) of nominal size 20 mm with a tolerance of c 1 I on
diameter length 70 mm and length of 60 mm from underside of head to centre of split pin hole, shall be
designated as:
Clevis Pin B20 -
IS : 6863
c 11 X 70 X 60 -
7.1 The pin surfaces shall be smooth and free from serrations,
roll marks shall be permissible.
7.2 The pins shall be free from burrs, imperfect
8. Sampling of non-threaded
9. Packing
Sampling and acceptance

fasteners.
die marks, deep scratches,
edges, pit marks, loose scale, cracks and other harmful defects.
with IS : 6821-1973 Method for sampling
criteria to be in accordance
The pins shall be packed in suitable
cartons.
10. Marking - The cartons containing the pins, shall be marked

trade-mark,
if any, nominal size and the quantity of pins.
Marking
etc, although slight free
Details available
with the manufacturers
with the Indian
EXPLANATORY
Standard
name or initial or
Institution.
NOTE
In the preparation
of this standard, assistance has been drawn from IS0 2341-1972 Clevis pins with
head-metric
series issued by the International
Organization
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
93
---E-z
IS :7368-
1974
Indian Standard
SIECIFICATION
FOR GROOVED
TAPER
PINS
1. Scope - This standard covers the requirements for grooved taper pins in the size range 1.5 to 25 mm intended
for use as fastening elements for general engineering purposes.
2. Dimensions
and Tolerances
2.1 The grooved
taper pins shall conform
to the shape and dimensions
2.2 The preferred
length-diameter
combinations
2.3 The preferred
length-diameter
over grooving
2.4 Tolerances
on the hole receiving
,are given in Table

combinations
given in Table
1.
1.
are given in Table
1.
the pins shall be as shown below:
Dia dl
Tol
Up to 3 mm
H9.
Above 3 mm
HII
--r
3. Materials - The pins shall be made of cold drawn steel Conforming to C40 of IS : 1570-1961 Schedules for
wrought steqls for general engineering purposes. Where so specified, pins may also be supplied in corrosion,esistant steel, copper, brass or monel metal as agreed upon between the manufacturer
and user.
4. Finish - The pins shall be supplied in natural bright finish unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. At the
request of purchaser, pins may be copper plated, nickel plated, cadmium plated, phosphated or anodized. The
properties shall not be impaired by the protective coatings.
5. Designation - Pins shall be designated
protective coating, if any.
by the nominal
size, length of pin, the number
of this standard
and
Example:
A pin of nominal
size 3 mm and 12 mm in length with phosphate

Grooved
coating
shall be designated
as:
Taper Pin 3 X 12 IS : 7368 Phosphated
6.1 The grooves on the pin shall be made only by the metal-forming
maximum corresponding
hole.
6.3 Pins shall also be free from burrs, rust,pit
process ensuring interference
die marks, deep scratches, etc; although
marks, loose scale, cracks and all other harmful
6.4 The other requirements,

not covered in this standard, shall be in accordance
requirements
for the supply of metallurigical
materials ($rsr revision ).
7. Sampling - Sampling and acceptance criteria
Methods for sampling non-threaded
fasteners.
8. Packing - Unless otherwise specified, the number
Each carton shall have pins of one size only.
with respect to
shall be determined
slight free
defects.
with IS : 1387-1967 General
in accordance
with IS : 6821-1973
of pins packed in each carton shall be 100,500 and 1000.
9. Marking
3.1 Such marks as may be specified by the purchaser shall be stamped, during the process of manufacture, at the
end, except on those having nominal diameter 14 mm or under. The cartons containing the pins shall be marked
with the size and the manufacturers
name or trade-mark.
9.2 ISZCertrjlcation Marking -
Details available
with the Indian
Standards
Institution.
.
94
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 1368- 1974
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
AND TOLERANCES
FOR GROOVED
TAPER
PINS
( Clauses 2. I, 2.2 and 2.3 )

All dimensions
in millimetres.
IMETER
OVER
GROOVING
NOMINAL
DIAMETER
5
ToI
DIAMETER
OVER
GROOVING
3.25
2.2c I
4.30
2.70
5.30
6.30
3.30
1.60
6.35
1.35
5.35
lO.LO
12.LO
3.25
2.15
6.35
2.65
13.45
8.40
L.30
:
IO.45
5.30
3.20
12.45
__
13.50
14.50 (
/
16.60
6.30
8.35
1.25
O.&O
5.25
-L
12.40
I I
l--i
20.6C I2 5.6C
i-
6.25
8.30
10.35
a.25
-t-
HANDBOOK
Sizes shown in brackets
ON INDUSTRIAL
10.30
1
+0.05
Note -
12.30
to.10
are of second preference.
FASTENERS-PART
95
IS : 7368- 1974
EXPLANATORY
NOTE
In the preparation
of this standard, assistance has been taken from DIN 1471-1956 Kegelkerbstifte
(Grooved taper pins) issued by Deutscher Normenausschuss.
Illustration
of a few applications
is given in
Appendix
A. This standard ,is one of a series of Indian Standards being prepared on grooved pins. Other
standards belonging to this series are:
IS
IS
IS
IS
:
:
:
:
7383-1974
7384-1974
7385-1974
7386-1974
Grooved
Grooved
Grooved
Grooved
knuckle pins
straight pins with guide end
dowel pins
socket pins
APPENDIX
APPLICATIONS
FIG.
USED AS A PIN FOR RETAINING

A WATER PUMP IMPELLER
FIG. 3 USED AS A DRIVING

IN A CARDAN SHAFT
96
PIN
FIG. 2
FIG. 4
USED AS AN AXIAL
IN BEARING BUSH
PIN
USED AS A PIN FOR SECURING

A BEVEL GEAR
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
3
I
IS : 7383 - 1974
1
T
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
GROOVED KNUCKLE PINS
1. Scope - This standard

intended for use as joining
2. Dimensions

pins.
for grooved
knuckle
and Tolerances
2.1 The grooved
knuckle
pins shall conform
2.2 The preferred
length-diameter
combinations
are given in Table
2.3 The preferred
length-diameter
over grooving
combinations
2.4 Tolerances
pins in the size range 1.5 to 25 mm,
given in Table
1.
I.
are given in Table
1.
the pin shall he as shown below:

Tol
Din d,
to .3 mm
H9
Above 3 mm
HII
Up
FB
3. Material - The pins shall be made of cold drawn steel conforming to C40 of IS: 1570-1961 Schedules for
wrought steels for general engineering purposes. Where so specified, pins may also be supplied in corrosionresistant steel, copper, brass, monel metal as agreed upon between the manufacturer
and user.
4. Finish - The pins shall be supplied in natural bright finish, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. At the
5. Designation
and protective
- The pins shall be designated

coating; if any.
by the nominal
size, length of pinand
the number of this standard
Example:
A pin of nominal

Grooved
Knuckle
coating
shall be designated
as:
Pin 3 X 12 IS : 7383 Phosphated
6.1 The grooves on the pin should be made only by the metal-forming
to maximum corresponding
hole.
marks,
process ensuring
loose scale, cracks and all other harmful
shall be determined

with respect
die marks, deep scratches, etc; .althougR slight free
6.4 The other requirements

requirements
materials yirst revision).
fasteners.
interference
defects.
in accordance
with IS: 6821-1973
of pins packed in each carton shall be 100,500 or 1000.
9. Marking
end except those having nominal diameter 14 mm or under. The cartons containing the pins may be marked with
the size and the manufacturers
name or trade-mark.
Marking
Details available
with the Indian
Standards
Institution.
I
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
97
IS : 7383- 1974
TABLE
1 DIMENSIONS
AND TOLERANCES
FOR GROOVED
KNUCKLE
PINS
( Clauses 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3 )

All dimensions
r%?_
_v
in millimetres.
_ -G_.
/
_I
__-__3
NOMINAL
DIAMETER
Tol
1.5
1 2
I---_,--
124
1 3
0.23
/ 0.3
0.6
0.45
0.6
1.6
2.5
1 6
1 8
j 10 1 12
ToI on
I
I
/ (13) 1 14
O-9
/ 0.75
I
DIAMETER
1.2
1.5
/ 14
10
-12
OVE$
12dO
2.5
16
16
20
25
13.25
lL.25
16.25
13.30
lfi.30
16.30
1340
IfdO
12.50
13.50
iL.50
98
20.25
25.25
20.30
25.30
20*&O
2540
20.50
25.50
1640
8.10
1 25
12
ZE
6.35
Note -
1 20
GR~~wNG
5.25
DIAMETER
OVER GROOVING
1 16
hll
r APPROX
1 5
h9
c max.
LENGTH
16.50
TO.05
I
are of second preference.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
3
I
IS : 7383 - 1974
EXPLANATORY
NOTE
In the preparation
of this standard assistance has been taken from DIN 1475-1956 Knebelkerbstifte
(Grooved knuckle pins) issued by Deutscher Normenausschuss.
illustration
is given in
Appendix
A. This standard is one of a series of Indian Standards being prepared on grooved pins. Other
IS : 7368-1974 Grooved
taper pins
straight
dowel pins
socket pins
pins with guide end
APPENDIX
FIG. 1
USED
FIG. 2
AS A GUIDE
USED
PIN IN A WALL SOCKET
AS A KNUCKLE
IN A THREADED
BOLT
PL>UG
_._.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FhTENERS-PART
99
.---
IS : 7384- 1974
Indian Standard
GROOVED
1. Scope
-This
SPECIFICATION
FOR
STRAIGHT
PINS WITH GUIDE END
standard covers the requirements for grooved straight pins with guide end in the size range 1.5
for use as connecting pins and in rail vehicles construction.
to 25 mm intended
2. Dimensions
and Tolerances
2.1 The grooved
straight
2.2 The preferred
pins with guide end shall conform
length-diameter
combinations
2.2.1 For use in rail vehicle construction,

Table 2.
2.3 The preferred
2.4 Tolerances
length-diameter
of pin are given in Table
the preferred
over grooving
1.
1.
length-diameter
combinations
given in Table
combinations
are given in Table
of pin are given in
1.
the pin shall be as shown below:

Din dl
Tol
Up to 3 mm
H9
Above
3 mm
HI1
LZB
3.. Material - The pins shall be made of cola ur-awn steel conforming to C40 of IS: 1570-1961 Schedules for
wrought steels for general engineering purposes. Where so specified, pins may also be supplied in corrosionresistant steel, copper, brass or monel metal as agreed upon between the manufacturer
and user.
5. Designation
and protective

coating, if any.
by the nominal
size, length of pin and the number of this standard
Example:
A pin of nominal
Grooved

Straight
coating
shall be designated
as:
Pin with Guide End 3 X 12 IS : 7384 Phosphated
6.1 The grooves on the pin shall be made only by the metal-forming process
hole.
ensuring
interference

requirements
materials Cfirst revision).
and acceptance criteria
fasteners.
8. Packing -- Unless otherwise specified, the number
with respect to
shall be determined
slight free
defects.
in accordance
with IS: 6821-1973
9. Marking
9.1 Such marks as may Be specified by the purchaser shall be stamped, during the process of manufacture, at the
end except those having nominal diameter 14 mm or under. The cartons containing the pins shall be marked with
name or trade-mark.
100
HANDBOOK
DN INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 7384- 1974
9.2 IS/ Certification Marking -
Details available
with the Indian
Standards
Institution.
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES FOR GROOVED STRAIGHT PIN WITH GUIDE END
( Clauses
2.1 and
2.3
1 LENGTH
1~01 on]
DIAMETER
OVER
GROOVING
L.25
5.25
6.30
8.30
IO.35
12.35
(45)
50
(55)
60
(65)
70
90
!0.5
25.5
+o.a
90
100
(110)
TOLERANCE
ON
DIAMETER
OVER GROOVING
2 0.05
+0.05
Note - Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference.
101
,IS:1384- 1974
TABLE
PREFERRED
COI\1RINATION
I.EN(;T)I--I)IAbl~~TI~:R
GLIIDE
END
1Sk:D IN RZII,
IOR GROO\F:D
\EHl~l.l~:
COSS.rRI
STRAIGHT
PINS
WITH
CTIOY
+0.5
t-l
60
70
+o.B
80
Note 1 -
The lengths within the stepped
lines. particularly
those with the cross indication
are the preferred
ones.
Note 2 - The grooved straight pins with guide end are recommended
for use in rail vehicle construction.
Use of this type of pins
prevent tilting while being hammered in. If the sizes, not contained in Table 2, are unavoidable, these shall be taken from Table I.
EXPLANATORY
NOTE
In the preparation of this standard assistance has been taken from DIN 1470-1961 Zylinderkerbstifte
mit
Einguhr-Ende
(Grooved straight pins with guide end) issued by Deutscher Normenausschuss.
Illustration of a
few applications is given in Appendix A. This standard is one of a series of Indian Standards being prepared on
grooved pins. Other standards belonging to the series are:
102
taper pins
knuckle
dowel pins
socket pins
pins
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 7384-
APPENDIX
FIG. I
USED AS A TANGENTIAL
FIG. 3
USED AS AN AXIAL
FIG. 2
PIN
USED AS AN OBLIQUE OR INCLINED
FIG. 4
PIN
1974
USED AS A RADIAL
PIN
PIN
L.,.-_.----.
-.-
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS--PART
103
I : 7385- 1974
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
GROOVED DOWEL PINS
1. Scope - This standard

intended for use as joining
2. Dimensions

pins,
for grooved
dowel pins in the size range 1.5 to 25 mm,
and Tolerances
2.1 The grooved
dowel pins shall conform
2.2 The preferred
length-diameter
combinations
are given in Table
2.3 The preferred
length-diameter
over grooving
combinations
2.4 Tolerances
given in Table
1.
1.
are given in Table
1.

To1
Din dl
3. Material - The pins shall be made of cold drawn steel conforming to C40 of IS: 1570-1961 Schedules for
wrought steels for general engineering purposes. Where so specified, pins may also be supplied in corrosionresistant steel, copper, brass, or monel metal, as agreed upon between the manufacturer
and user.
5. Designation
and protective

coating, if any.
by the nominal
size, length of pin, the number
of this standard,
Example:
A pin of nominal

Grooved
coating
shall be designated
as:
Dowel Pin 3 X 12 IS : 7385 Phosphated
6.1 The grooves on the pin shall be made only by the metal-forming process
hole.
6.3 Pins shall also be free from burrs,
rust, pit marks,
ensuring interference
loose scale, cracks and all other harmful

requirements
fasteners.
with respect to
shall be determined
slight free
defects.
in accordance
with IS: 6821-1973
9. Marking
end,except those having nominal diameter 14 mm or under. The cartons containing the pins shall be marked with
name or trade-mark.
104
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :7x&9.2 ISI Cerbfication
Marking
TABLE
Details available
DIMENSIONS
with the Indian
AND TOLERANCES
Standards
FOR GROOVED
1914
Institution.
DOWEL
PINS
( Clauses 2. I, 2.2 and 23 )

All dimensions
NOMINAL
DIAMETER
1.5
c max.
r
APPROX
/ LENGTH
1 2.5
1 5
1 6
1 6
1 10 [ 12
h9
0.23
0.3
0.L
O.&S
0.6
0.75
0.9
1.2
1.5
1.8
2.5
1.6
2.5
10
12
12
16
16
20
DIAMETER
1 25
OVER
L
25,
GROOVING
2.15
+0.3
2.65
10
3.20
--
12
1 (13) 1 14 1 16 1 20
hll
/ToI on1
I
8
101
in millimetres.
5.25
1.63
I
6.25
-t
3.25
(14)
8.25
16
T
10.30
(18)
20
12.30
2.70
6.30
6.30
3.30
28
13.&O
2.15
(30)
lL.LO
8.35
16.50
32
36
3.25
40
13.45
6.35
(45)
20.50
25.51
20.60
25.6
lL.L5
16.55
50
(55)
&LO
60
lO.L5
(65)
70
13.x
6.30
-80
90
100
12.L5
__
+0.a
lL.55
8.35
/
IL.&S
0.35
t-
Note -
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
6.55
12.35
are of second preference
FASTENERS-PART
105
1s :7385 - 1974
EXPLANATORY
NOTE
of this standard assistance has been taken from DIN 1472-1956 Passkerbstite
In the preparation
Illustration
is given in
(Grooved dowel pins) issued by Deutscher Normenausschuss.
Appendix A. This standard is one of a series of Indian Standards being prepared on grooved pins. Other
standards belonging to the series are:
taper pins
knuckle
pins
straight
pins with guide end
socket pins
APPENDIX
APPLICATIONS
FIG.
FIG. 3
USED AS A STOP PIN
USED AS A DOOR
HINGING
PIN
FIG. 2
SECURING
THE POSITION
OF A BEARING
FIG.,4
STOP
HANDBOOK
PIN FOR A VALVE
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :7386 - 1974
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
GROOVED
SOCKET PINS
1. Scope -- This standard covers the requirements

for grooved socket pins in the size range 1.5 to 25 mm
intended for use for connecting purposes and as a fixture in the hole receiving them.
2. Dimensions
and Tolerances
2.1 The grooved
socket pins shall conform
2.2 The preferred
length-diameter
combinations
are given in Table
2.3 The preferred
length-diameter
over grooving
combinations
2.4 Tolerances
given in Table
1.
1.
are given in Table
1.
h
Dia dl
Tol
Up to 3 mm
H9
Above 3 mm
HI1
3. Materials - The pins shall be made of cold drawn steel conforming to C40 of IS : 1570-1961 Schedules for
wrought steels for general engineering purposes. Where so specified, pins may also be supplied in corrosionresistant steel, copper, brass, monel metal as agreed to between the manufacturer
and user.
4. Finish -The
pins shall be supplied in natural bright finish unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. At the
request of purchaser, pins may be copper plated. nickel plated, cadmium plated, phosphated or anodized. The
5. Designation - Pins shall be designated
protective coating, if any.
by the nominal
size, length of pin and the number of this standard
and
Example:
A pin of nominal

Grooved
coating
shall be designated
as:
Socket Pin 3 X 12 IS : 7386 Phosphated
6.1 The grooves on the pin shall be made only by the metal-forming
hole.
process ensuring
interference

requirements
fasteners.
shall be determined

with respect to
slight free
defects.
in accordance
with IS: 6821-1973
9. Marking
end, except on those having nominal diameter 14 mm or under. The cartons containing the pins shall be marked
with the size and the manufacturers
name or trade-mark.
HANDBOOK
Marking -
Details available
ON INDUSTWIALFASTENERS-PART
with the Indian
Standards
fnstitution
107
IS : 7386 - 1974
TABLE 1
DIMENSIONS
AND TOLERANCES
FOR GROOVED
SOCKET PINS
( Clauses 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3)

DIAMETER
OVER
GROOVING
--E
6.15
I
) 2.70 t-_-1 ~25 )
10.20
12.25
6.30
i--i
13.25
12.&O) 13.&O
6.35 ( &LO
IO45
12.50
13.50
IL.50
16.50
20.50
25.50
20.15
25.45
10.60
12.65
13.45
IL.45
16.L5
4
DIAMETER
OVER GROOVING
Note -
to.05
ro.05
2 0.10
1
I4
Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference.
_..
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 7386 - 1974
EXPLANATORY
NOTE
In the preparation
of this standard, assistance has been taken from DIN 1474-1956 Steck-kerbstifte
(Grooved socket pins) issued by Deutscher Normenausschuss.
Illustration
is given in
Appendix A. This standard is one of a series of Indian Standards being prepared on grooved pins. Other
taper pins
knuckle
pins
straight
pins with guide end
dowel pins,
APPENDIX
APPLICATIONS
FIG.
USED
AS A HANDLE
FIG. 3
FOR A VALVE
FIG. 2
USED AS A STOP PIN

ON A GAS TAP
USED AS A STOP PIN ON THE ARMATURE

OF MINIATURE
ELECTRIC
MOTOR
---
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
109
IS : 8351 - 1977
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
(HEAVY
1. Scope--
2. Dimensions
FOR SPIRAL
DUTY TYPE)
PINS
of spiral pins of heavy duty type in the diameter
range 1.5 to 6 mm.
and Tolerances
2.1 As given in Table
I.
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
FOR
SPIRAL
All dimensions
PINS OF HEAVY
DUTY
TYPE
in millimetres.
e
_----
Qdc
@d2
I
--la-
Size*
1.5
o==
0.5
0.7
0.8
1.3
1.7
0.22
0.28
0.33
0.45
0.56
0.67
2. I
2.6
3.12
4.15
5.15
6.25
+ 0.1
0
+ 0.1
0
+ 0.13
0
+ 0.15
0
+ 0.15
0
+ 0.15
0
0.17
Basic
2.5
1.6
d,
To1
Before
Fitting
+ 0.08
0
Basic
1.4
1.9
2.35
2.85
3.8
4.8
5.8
dz
Tol
-
Shear
Force.
in Nt
0
0.1
0
0.15
0
0.15
0
0.15
0
0.2
0
0.3
0
0.4
Single
Shear
892
I 539
2 324
3 363
6 021
9 276
13 238
Double
Shear
I 784
3 078
4 648
6 726
12 042
18 552
26 476
Min
*Size of the spiral pin is also the nominal

t I N = 0.102 kgf.
110
diameter
of the receiving
hole.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 8351
2.2 The preferred
TABLE
length-sire
combinations
PREFERRED
01 the spir;ll
LENGTH-SIZE
COMBINATIONS
All dimensions
Note -
Preferred
2.3 Tolerance
length-size
combinations
pins shall
be as giccn
OF SPIRAL
in Table
PINS OF
- 1977
2.
HEAVY DliTY TYPE
in millimetres.
are between the stepped
bold lines.
the pin shall be H 12.
3. Material - Spiral pins of heavy duty type shall be made from carbon spring steel 75C6 [see IS : 2507-l 975
Specification
for cold rolled steel strip for springs (_firsrrevision)] hardened and tempered to 350 to 475 HV[see
IS : 1501-1968 Method for Vickers hardness test for steel (jirst revision)].
4. Designation - Spiral pins of heavy duty type shall be designated
standard, and protective coating, if any.
by the name, size, length, number
of this
Example:
A spiral pin of heavy duty type of nominal
be designated as:
size 3 mm and length 24 mm with phosphate
coating shall
Spiral Pin 3 X 24 IS : 8351 Phosphated

5. Sampling
and Acceptance
5.1 The sampling procedure for the testing and acceptance criteria for the spkal pins shall be in accordance
IS : 6821-1973 Methods for sampling non-threaded
fasteners.
5.2 For purposes
be as follows:
of sampling
and criteria for conformity
Major
Outside
Defect
diameter,
the classification
Minor
d,
Diameter
with
of defects into major and minor shall
Defect
over chamfer,
dz
(measured with a ring

Sheet thickness,
gauge)
Length, I
Freedom from burrs
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
111
IS : 8351 - 1977
6. General
Requirements
6.1 Worktl?at7.~h;p .-.- The surface of the spiral pins shall be smooth and free from scale and burrs. The outer
edges shall be deburred and may also be slightly rounded.
6.2 Finish -~~The spiral pins shall be supplied in natural bright finish unless otherwise specified by the purchaser.
At the request of the purchaser, spiral pins may be copper plated, nickel plated, cadmium plated or phosphated.
The properties shall not be impaired by the protective coatings.
6.3 Shear Strength - Shear force in double shear when tested in accordance with IS : 5242-1969 Method oftest
for determining
shear strength of mild steel with suitably hardened steel bushes, shall not be less than that
specified in Table 1.
EXPLANATORY
NOTE
Spiral pins are used for joining (pinning) two or more parts. Apart from their role as fasteners, they may
be employed
as hinges, pivots, locating devices, retainers and so on. The spiral shaped cross-section
(approximately
2% turns) confers high elastic deformability
on the spiral pins. This means that they are also
capable of sustaining dynamic loading. The individual turns of the pin exert a constant preload over the
periphery so that a uniform bearing pressure is likely to result in the receiving hole.
The heavy duty pin is recommended
where shear, shock and vibration
static shear load is greater than the shock and vibration loads.
strength
loads are severe and where the,
The two ends of the pin are given a conical form to facilitate entry into the receiving hole. The shear
of the spiral pin is the same in every radial position and consequently there is no need to align them.
Medium duty spiral pins are covered by a separate Indian Standard. The difference between the two types
of spiral pins is only in the sheet thickness and hence in shear strength. Dimensionally,
the two types of spiral pins
are interchangeable.
Illustration
of an application is given in Fig. I.
FIG. I
USED AS A RADIAL
PIN
In the preparation
of this standard, considerante assistance has been derived from DIN 7344 Spiral
spannstifte, schwere Ausfuhrung (Spiral pins, heavy duty type), 1969, issued by Deutsches lnstitut fur Normung.
112
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
FOR
SPIRAL
PINS OF MEDIUM
DITY TYPE
( C/0USC~
2. I )
All dimensions
in millimetres.
_
Size*
0.8
a=
0.2
0.3
0.07
1.2
0.08
0.4
(
0. I
1.5
0.5
0.13
2.5
0.7
0.17
0.85
I.
1.3
1.62
2.15
3.5
0.8
0.21
Basic
0.25
2.65
I.2
1.3
0.29
0.33
3.67
4.2
T-
-T-
3.15
To1
0.05
Before
fitting
Basic
0.75
+ 0.25
+ 0.25
+ 0.35
t 0.01
0.95
1.15
1.4
I .9
2.35
2.85
3.35
3.x
1.x
5.x
7.75
96
+ 0.01
+ 0.15
+ 0.15
+ 0. I7
+ 0.2
+ 0.75
0
I I.5
___
d2
TOI
0
0.05
0.1
0.1
0
~~ 0.1
0.15
0.15
0
~~ 0.15
I-
Min
*Size
of the spiral
f IN
~0.102
pin is also the nominal
diameter
of the receiving
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
I
Shear
force
in N+
hole
kgf.
1.2
I 3.
16.55
---
+ 0.25
+ 0.01
+ 0.05
14.55
dl
I=I=
-I4.5
4 x34
7 492
IO x35
I9 220
30 516
43 9x0
9 66X
I4 9x4
21 670
3x 440
61 032
x7 960
+ 0.4
0
+ 0.45
0
13.5
1.54
0.9
60 424
74 575
--1
I20
84X
149 150
IS : 8379 - 1977
TABLE
PREFERRED
LENGTH-SIZE
COMBINATIONS
( Clause 2.2
All dimensions
180
t .i.
Note
-
Preferred
length-size
are between the stepped
EXPLANATORY
Spiral pins are used for joining (pinning)
also be employed as hinges, .pivots, locating
(approximately
2% turns) confers high elastic
capable of sustaining dynamic loading. The
periphery, so that a uniform bearing pressure
PINS OF MEDIUM
TYPE
bold lines
NOTE
two or more parts. Apart from their role as fasteners, they may
devices, retainers and so on. The spiral shaped cross-section
deformability
on the spiral pins. This means that they are also
individual turns of the pin exert a constant preload over the
is likely to be exerted in the receiving hole.
The medium duty pin is recommended

where shear, shock and vibration
where shock and vibration are greater than the static shear load.
strength
DITY
in millimetres
combinations
OF SPIRAL
are of medium
intensity
and
The two ends of the pin are given a conical form to facilities entry into the receiving hole. The shear
of the spiral pin is the same in every radial position and consequently there is no need to align them.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRlAL
FASTENERS-PART
115
IS : 8379 - 1977
Heavy duty spiral pins are covered by a separate Indian Standard. The difference between the two types of
spiral pins is only in the sheet thickness and hence in shear strength. Dimensionally,
the two types of Spiral Pins
are interchangeable.
Illustration
of an application
is given below.
FIG. 1 USED AS A RADIAL
PIN
In the preparation
of this standard considerable assistance has been derived from DIN 7343 SpiralSPannstifte, Reglausfiihrung
(Spiral pins, medium duty type), issued by the Deutsches Institut fiir Normung,
116
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :10248
- 1982
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
CYLINDRICAL PINS WITH INTERNAL
I._ Scope
i0 mm.
Covers
the requirements
2. Types .- The cylindrical

Type A -
Unhardened
Type B -
Hardened
3. Dimensions
of cylindrical
pins with internal
pins with internal
threads
threads shall be of the following
3.2 The preferred
and tolerances
length-diameter
TABLE1
for cylindrical
pins Hith internal
combinations
for cylindrical
range 6 to
two types:
If
750
l-----------4
TYPE
threads (Types A and B) shall be as given in
pins with internal
threads are given inTable
DIMENSlONSANDTOLERANCESFORCYLINDRlCALPlNS
All dimensions
in millimetres.
qd21
rO4
___..__._
ENLARGED
DETAIL AT X
iAIR VENT1 Al THE

DISCRETION
OF
MANUFACTURER
A (UNHARDENED)
TYPE
B (HARDENED)
(OTHER
OIMENSIONS
DETAILS
AS PER
h8 may also be used at the request of the purchaser.
HANDBO'OKONINDUSTRIALFASTENERS-PART3
B
in the diameter
and Tolerances
3.1 The dimensions

Table 1.
*Tolerance
THREADS
AND
TYPEA)
2.
1IS :10248
- 1982
TAB1.E 2
PREFERRED
LENGTH-DIAMETER
COMBINATIONS
( Clause 3.2 1
All dimensions
Note 1 -
Preferred
length-diameters
Note 2 ~ For nominal
combinations
FOR CYLINDRICAL
PINS
in millimetres
are between the stepped bold lines.
lengths above 200 mm, steps of 20 mm
may be used.
3.3 The tolerances for form and position shall be accoraing to Tgrade of accuracy to IS : 2102 (Part 2)General
tolerances for dimensions and form and position: Part 2 General tolerances for form and position (second
revision)*(under
preparation)
.
3.4 The internal
screw threads:
threads shall conform to 6H tolerance

Part 4 Tolerancing
system.
of IS : 4218 (Part 4)-1976 Specification
for IS0 metric
4. Material
4.1 Type A pins (unhardened)
carbon and carbon-manganese
4.2 Type B pins (hardened)
shall be manufactured
from free cutting steel to IS : 4431-1978 Specification
free-cutting steel ($rst revision).
shall be made from steel having a minimum
tensile strength
of 600 N/mm2.
5. Hardness - Type B pins shall have a surface hardness of 60 f 2 HRC [see IS : 1586-1968 Method
Rockwell hardness test (B and C scales) for steel yirst revision)].
118
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
for
FASTENERS-P,ART
for
IS :10248 - 1982
6. Designation
6.1 Cylindrical pins with internal threads shall be designated by the name, type (A or R), nominal
tolerance on nominal diameter, nominal length, and the number of the standard.
diameter
Example:
A cylindrical pin with internal thread, Type A of a nominal diameter dl = 6 mm, tolerance
nominal diameter as m 6 and nominal length I = 20 mm shall be designated as:
Cylindrical
7. Workmanship
and Finish -
on
Pin A6m6 X 20 IS : 10248
All pins shall be manufactured
free from burrs, scales and tool marks.
8. Sampling
and Acceptance
Criteria Unless ,otherwise agreed to between the purchaser
and the
manufacturer,
the method of sampling and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with IS : 2614- 1969
Methods for sampling of fasteners cfirst revision); except for major and minor defects (see 8.1) and acceptable
quality levels (AQL) (see 8.2) listed in this standard.
8.1 Major and minor
8.2 Acceptable
below:
defects are given below:
Quality Levels (AQL) -
The acceptable
levels for pins covered in this standard
shall be as given
>pjFpiq
Acceptable
quality levels (AQL) percent
Note - For loosening the cylindrical pins, screws with minimum property class 10.9 are required. For cylindrical pins with lengths
above 6 X do, there is a possibility that even with screw of property class 10.9, the force required may go beyond yield point of the screw.
9.1 Unless the purchaser has specified specific treatment at the time of making enquiry or at the time of placing
order, the pins shall be supplied in a well cleaned condition and provided with a thin film of oil to protect against
rust.
10. Packing - The cylinderical pins with internal threads shall be packed in cartons or boxes in quantities of 10,
25, 50 or 100. The size, quantity and the manufacturers
name or trade-mark shall be clearly indicated on the
cartons or boxes.
Marking -
Details available
with the Indian
EXPLANATORY
Standards
Institution.
NOTE
Cylindrical pins with internal threads are used as dowel pins in blind holes. The pins are provided with a
flat or small groove along the length to facilitate escape of air from the blind hole for easy driving in of the pins.
When required to be withdrawn, from the blind holes, the pins are extracted with the help of internal threads
provided therein.
In the preparation
of the standard,
DIN 7979-1977 Parallel

HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
considerable
pins with internal
FASTENERS-PART
assistance
has been derived from:
threads issued by Deutsches
lnstitut
fur Normung.
119
SECTION C
Nails
IS :123 - 1972
Indian
Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
STEEL COUNTERSUNK
HEAD WIRE NAILS
( Second
Revision )
_--p
.~__ -1. Scope -- Requirements
of steel countersunk
head wire nails.
2. Material - Nails shall be manufactured

from mild steel wire conforming to IS : 280-1962 Specification for
mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (revised) having a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 550
MPa and satisfying bend test as in 7.1.
3. Dimensions and Tolerances-The
according to Tables 1 to 4.
dimensions
and tolerances
of the countersunk
3.1 The bend of shank as shown in Fig. 1 shall not exceed 1.0 percent
3.2 Eccentricity
head type wire nails shall be
of total length.
and ovality of the centre of the nail head from axis of shank shall be as below:
For nails with shank diameter

TABLE
DIMENSIONS
L 2.00 mm; maximum

< 2.00 mm; maximum
AND
TOLERANCES
OF STEEL
12 percent
14 percent
of shank diameter,
of shank diameter,
COUNTERSUNK
HEAD
WIRE
MUX
MUX
NAILS
1.25 TO 1.40 mm)
(SIZE
( Clauses 3 and 5 )
All dimensions
in millimetres.
2.75 d
62= 1 TO 1.5
D =
Size d
(Shank
Head Diameter
Length
Din)
Basic
Tolerance
1.25
1.40
Approximate
Number
Basic
Tolerarice
Basic
f 0.04
3.4
df 0.17
20
1.0
5 060
f 0.04
3.8
f 0.17
20
1.0
3 040
Tolerance
Note - The number of nails per kilogram is likely to vary to a considerable

table is intended only for guidance to the purchaser.
HANDBOOK
of Nails/kg
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
extent. The figure given in the
123
IS : 723 - 1972
_TABLE
DIMENSIONS
AND TOLERANCES
OF STEEL COUNTERSUNK
(SIZE 1.60 TO 1.80 mm)
HEAD
WIRE NAILS
( Clauses 3 and 5 )
All dimensions
in millimetres.
--D= 2-S
e
Size d
(Shank Dia)
Length
L
Tolerance
4.0
f 0.2
1 TO 1*5 d
Head Diameter
D
Basic
1.80
f 0.04
4.5
Basic
Approximate
Number of Nails/kg
Tolerance
15
It 1.0
3 940
20
1.0
2 710
25
1.2
2 110
25
* 1.2
1 720
30
I 410
f 0.23
1.2

I
1
OF
FIG.
4. Designation-The
standard.
countersunk
BEND OF SHANK
head nails shall be designated
by the size, length and the number
of this
Example:
# countersunk
head nail of size 4.00 mm and length

designated as:
100 mm shall be
Nail 4 X 100 IS : 723

124
HANDBOOK.ON
INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :I23 - 1972
a
TABLE 3
DIMENSIONS
AND TOLERANCES
FOR STEEL COUNTERSUNK
HEAD WIRE NAILS
(SIZE 2.00 TO 2.80 mm)

( Clauses 3 and 5 )
All dimensions
in millimetres.
Dz 2d
e = 1 TO 1*5 cl
Size d
(Shank Dia)
Basic
2.00
Head Diameter
D
Basic
Tolerance
f 0.04
4.00
Tolerance
Approximate
Number of Nails/kg
Length
L
Basic
Tolerance
25
1.2
I 470
30
1.2
1 170
40
1.5
840
50
f 2.1
650
f 0.2
2.24
f 0.04
4.5
f 0.23
40
1.5
700
2.50
f 0.05
5.0
f 0.25
50
f 2.1
550
2.80
f 0.06
5.6
f 0.28
60
f 2.1
350

5. General Requirements - The nails shall be machine made and may have die marks and feeding knife marks
on the shank. They shall be uniformly circular in section, straight, free from wasters and the ends shall be pointed
to conform to the dimensions given in Tables 1 to 4. The heads shall be properly formed, chequered and
concentric with the shank.
6. Finish finished.
Unless otherwise
specified by the purchaser
countersunk
head wire nails shall be supplied
bright
7. Test
7.1 Bend Test - Steel countersunk head wire nails, selected according to 9.2, when cold shall not break or
develop cracks, when doubled over either by pressure or by blow from a hammer until1 the internal radius is equal
to the diameter of the test piece and the sides are parallel.
8. Packing -
Nails of different
sizes and types shall be packed in separate
containers.
8.1 Nails including25 mm in length and below shall be packed in cardboard boxes and the net weight of each box
shall be 0.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags, and the net weight of each bag shall be 50 kg.
8.2 Nails above 25 mm and below 80 mm in length shall be packed in cardboard boxes and the net weight of each
box shall be 2.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags, and the net weight of each bag shall be 50 kg.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
125
--.-------..A
IS : 723 - 1972
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
AND
TOLERANCES
(SIZE
FOR
STEEL
COUNTERSUNK
HEAD
WIRE
NAILS
3.15 TO 10 mm)
( Clauses 3 and 5 )
All dimensions
in millimetres.
D= l-ad
e=l
Size
TO 1*5d
Head Diameter
Length
(Shank Dia)
Approximate
Number
Tolerance
Basic
Tolerance
Basic
3.15
f 0.06
5.7
f 0.29
60
3.55
5 0.06
6.4
4.00
f 0.06
1.2
I
f 0.32
I----
4.50
8. I
f 0.06
9.0
f 0.45
I
f 2.6
100
f 0.41
230
f 2.1
I
Tolerance
80
f 0.36
Basic
of Nails/kg
140
f 3.4
90
I
90
f 3.1
90
100
f 3.4
80
125
f 3.8
65
100
* 3.4
60
125
& 3.8
50
150
f 3.8
6.30
f 0.06
11.3
1 f 0.57
I
8.00
f 0.06
14.4
f 0.06
18.0
150
30
If3.81
I
200
f 4.4
12
225
f 4.4
10
f 0.72
I
10.00
I
f 0.90
I
250
I
I
f 4.4

table is intended only for.guidance
to the purchaser.
8.3 Nails 80 mm and above in length shall be packed in wrappings of double gunny bags, the weight of the each
package being I5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in cases of bituminized canvas or hessian bags; the net weight
of each package shall be 50 kg.
9. Scale of Sampling
and Criteria for Conformity
9.1 Lot - In any consignment all the packages of nails of the same type and size manufactured
similar conditions shall be grouped together to constitute a lot.
126
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
under essentially
FASTENERS-PART
IS:723
- 1972
9.2
Selection qf Samples - The number of nails to be selected at random from the lot shall depend on the size of
the lot and shall be in accordance with co1 1 and 2 ofTable 5. The nails shall be selected from at least 25 percent of
the packages.
9.3 Visual and Dimensional

9.3.1
Number
manufacturing
Characteristics
of tests and criteria for canfrmity
defects, dimensions
All the nails selected as in 9.2 shall be examined
for
and ffnish.
9.3.2 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of these characteristics if the number of
nails examined for characteristics,mentioned
in 9.3.1 and found defective does not exceed the corresponding
acceptance number given in co1 3 of Table 5.
TABLE
SCALE
OF SAMPLING
AND CRITERIA
( Clauses 9.2, 9.3.2 and
Approximate
Number of Nails
FOR CONFORMITY
9.4. I )
For Visual and Dimensional

Characteristic
For Bend Test
in the Lot
1
-R Sub-sample
Permissible
to be Selected
Number of
Defective Nails
Size
Number of
Defective Nails
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
up to 1 000
1001 to3000
3 001 to IO000
IO 001to 35 000
35 001 and above
32
50
80
125
5
7
IO
14
0
0
0
200
21
8
13
20
32
50
I
2
Note -- The sampling plan accepts the lots containing 7 percent or less defectives in respect of visual and dimensional
characteristics
more than 95 percent of the tikes. In the case of bend test the lot containing I .5 percent or l&s defectives will be
accepted more than 95 percent of the times.
9.4
Bend
Test
9.4.1 Number of tests and criteriafor conformity - The number of nails to be selected for carrying out bend
test shall be according to co1 4 of Table 5. These nails shall be selected from those already inspected according
to 9.3.1 and found satisfactory.
The lot shall be considered as confoiming

pass this test does not exceed the corresponding
to the requirements of bend test if the number of nails failing to

acceptance number in co1 5 of Table 5.
9.5 The lot shall be considered
as conforming
10. Marking
of nails shall be marked
All packages
a)
Manufacturers
b)
Type of nail,
Size (shank diameter)
d)
Net weight of the package.
HANDBOOK
Marking
ON INDUSTRIAL
of the specification
with the following
if it satisfies 9.3.1 and 9.4.1.
information;
name or trade-mark,
c)
to the requirements
and length of nail, and
Details available
FASTENERS-PART
with the Indian
Standards
Institution.
127
IS : 723 - 1972
EXPLANATORY
changes
The specification for mild steel wire nails was first revised in 1961. In the present revision the following
have been made:
a)
The angle of countersunk
b)
Nail head diameter has been changed to 2dfor shank diameters ranging between 2.0 to 2.8 mm and to
1.8d for shank diameters above 2.8 mm.
c)
Tolerances
d)
Provision
e)
The sampling plan has been suitably

4 percent to 7 percent.
f)
The present revision covers only countersunk

separate standards, as follows:
IS
IS
IS
IS
IS
128
NOTE
:
:
:
:
:
for eccentricity
for galvanized
6730-1972
6732-1972
6733-1972
6734-1972
6738-1972
has been increased
from 90 to 120.
and ovality of nail heads has been specified.

finish nails has been deleted and plain finish has been specified.
modified to permit allowable
percentage
of defective nails from
head wire nails. The other types are being covered by
Felt nails
Double point nails
Wall and roofing nails
Cut lath and lath nails
Panel pins and lost head nails
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 725 - 1961
Indian Standard
FOR COPPER
SPECIFICATION
WIRE
NAILS
( Revised )
D. Foreword
Il.1 The revised Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 25 November 1961, after
the draft finalized by the Builders Hardware Sectional Committee had been approved by the Building Division
Council.
D.2 This standard was first issued in 1956 specifying the shank diameters of various types of copper wire nails in
SWG,(Standard
Wire Gauge), lengths in inches and packing requirement in pounds. In view of the adoption of
the metric system of weights and measures by the Government
of India, revision of this standard was felt
necessary by all concerned interests. During working of this standard certain manufacturing
difficulties also
:ame to light. This revision, therefore,,provides
for tolerance on taper length of nails and relaxes tolerance on size
of head in case of rose-head boat nails and specifies the dimensions and packing requirements
of copper wire
nails in the metric system.
3.3 The Sectional Committee responsible for the preparation of this standard has taken into consideration
the
views of producers, consumers and technologists and has related the standard to the manufacturing
and trade
>ractices followed in the country in this field. Due weightage has also been given to the need for international
coordination among standards prevailing in different countries of the world.
I.4 Wherever a reference to any Indian Standard
.he latest version of the standard.
I.5 Metric system has been adopted
n this system,.
appears in this specification
in India and all quantfiies
and dimensions
it shall be taken as a reference to

in this standard
have been given
I.6 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
Jalue, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with
IS : 2-1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant places retained in the
-ounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
I.7 This standard is intended chiefly to cover the technical
lot include all the necessary provisions of a contract.
provisions
relating to copper wire nails, and it does
I. Scope
1.1 This standard
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
covers the following
types of copper wire nails:
Rose-head boat nails square shank, square point (see Fig.l),

Countersunk-head
boat nails square shank, sharp square point (see Fig. 2),
Countersunk-head
boat nails, square shank, round point (see Fig. 3),
Wrought tacks (see Fig. 4), and
Cut-lath nails (Cut tacks) (see Fig. 5).
L
2.5 0
1.
DSQ
FIG. 1
ROSE-HEAD
t
SQUARE
BOAT NAIL,
SHANK,
SQUAREPo1NT
L
O-75
2$r*Z
250_
--I*
, OSQ
Jj;0
2-50
?
FIG. 2 COUNTERSUNK-HEAP
BOAT
NAIL, SQUARE SHANK SHARP
SQUARE POINT
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
:I::
t
FIG. 3 COUNTERSUNK-HEAD
BOAT NAIL,
SQUARE SHANK, ROUND POINT
129
IS :725 - 1961
FIG. 4
WROUGHT
TACK
FIG. 5 CUT-LATH
(CUTTACK)
NAIL
2. Material
2.1 The wire used for nails shall have copper content not less than 99.2 percent and shall have a minimum
ultimate tensile strength of 28.0 kg/mm* with a maximum elongation of 10 percent on a length of 50 mm. The
wire shall withstand the following bend test:
Suitable test pieces when cold shall not break or develop crack when doubled over, either by pressure or
by blows from a hammer, until the internal radius is equal to the diameter of the test piece and the sides are
parallel.
2.2 The tin used in finishing
of copper nails shall have a purity of 99 percent.
3. Manufacture
3.1 The nails shall be machine made and may have die marks on the neck. They shall be uniform in section,
straight, free from wasters, and shall have sharp points. The heads shall be properly formed and concentric with
the shank.
4. Dimensions
and Tolerances
4.1 The dimensions of the different types of copper nails shall satisfy the respective requirements
them in Fig. I to Fig. 5 and Table 1.
specified for
4.2 Tolerances
4.2.1 The maximum permissible variation from the dimensions
cut-lath nails (cut tacks) shall be as follows:
Size of
Shank,
Across
Flats
given in Table 1 for copper nails other than
Tolerance
r
Head Dia or
Side of
Square
percent
Size of Shank
Across Flats,
5.00 to 2.50
f 7%
f 0.05
2.50
f 7%
f 0.05
Less than 2.50
It 7%
f 0.04
mm
4.2.2 In the case of cut-lath

Table 1 shall be as follows:
Length,
L
DSQ
mm
nails (cut tacks) the maximum
Tolerance
permissible
mm
- 0.0
+ 1.5
- 0.0
+ 1.0
- 0.0
+ 1.0
variation
from the dimensions
given in
on
/\
Head Dia
Percent
f5
Size of Shank,
(Dia)
mm
f 0.10
130
:ffb
4.2.3The tolerance
provided
Length,
on taper length (2.50) of the different types of copper

the overall length (L) of the nail is within the tolerance permitted.
HANDBOOK
wire nails shall be ;;;
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :725 - 1961
5. Finish
5.1 Copper nails shall be finished bright unless specifically
free from burrs and sharp edges except at the points.
required by the purchaser
5.1.1 When copper nails are tinned, the tin coating shall cover the nails completely,
and uniform.
to be tinned. They shall be

and shall be even, smooth
*
TABLE 1
Type of
Nail
(1)
Rose-head
boat nails,
square
shank,
Square point
DIMENSIONS
Length
L
AND APPROXIMATE
COUNT OF COPPER NAILS
( Clauses 4.1, 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 l
Depth
Size of
Head
of
Shank,
Din
Head
Across
or side
of
Flats,
Square
DSQ
6Q
50
50
50
45
45
45
40
40
40
35
35
35
30
30
30
25
25
25
25
(3)
mm
5.00
4.00
5.00
4.00
3.15
5.00
4.00
3.15
4.50
4.00
3.15
2.50
4.00
3.15
2.50
4.00
3:15
2.50
2.00
3.15
2.50
2.00
3.15
2.50
2.00
3.15
2.50
2.00
3.15
2.50
2.00
3.15
2.50
2.00
5.00
2.50
2.00
1.60
(4)
mm
12.5
10.0
12.5
10.0
7.9
12.5
10.00
7.9
11.2
10.0
7.9
6.2
10.0
7.9
6.2
10.0
7.9
6.2
5.0
7.9
6.2
5.0
7.9
6.2
5.0
7.9
6.2
5.0
7.9
6.2
5.0
7.9
6.2
5.0
12.5
6.2
5.0
4.0
(5)
mm
2.5
2.0
2.5
2.0
1.6
2.5
2.0
1.6
2.2
2.0
1.6
1.2
2.0
1.6
1.2
2.0
1.6
1.2
1.0
1.6
1.2
1.0
1.6
1.2
1.0
1.6
1.2
1.0
1.6
1.2
I.0
1.6
1.2
I.0
2.5
1.2
1.0
0.8
125
100
100
100
90
80
80
70
70
60
60
50
50
40
30
25
20
5.00
5.00
4.00
3.15
3.55
5.00
3.15
5.00
3.15
4.00
3.15
3.55
3.15
3.15
3.15
3.15
3.15
12.5
12.5
10.0
7.9
8.9
12.5
7.9
12.5
7.9
10.0
7.9
8.9
7.9
7.9
7.9
7.9
7.9
3.8
3.8
3.0
2.4
2.7
3.8
2.4
3.8
2.4
3.0
2.4
2.7
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
(2)
mm
110
110
100
100
100
90
90
90
80
80
::
70
70
70
60
60
60
Countersunkhead boat
nails, square
shank, sharp
square point
Approx
No. of
Nails
fy
kg
(6)
40
65
50
70
I10
55
80
120
80
90
145
220
100
160
240
110
170
260
440
220
330
550
220
380
640
270
430
750
330
500
900
400
600
I 000
160
890
I 000,
1 760
50
70
120
100
60
130
70
160
115
170
170
210
290
370
420
375
Continued
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
131
IS : 725 - 1961
TABLE 1
Type of
Nail
DIMENSIONS
AND APPROXIMATE
Length
L
Size of
Shank,
Across
Flats,
COUNT OF COPPER
NAILS
Conrd
Depth
of
Head
DSQ
Head
Dia
or side
of
Square
(2)
mm
(3)
mm
(4)
mm
(5)
mm
(6)
Countersunkhead boat
nails, square
shank, round
point
40
25
2.50
2.50
6.2
6.2
1.2
1.2
480
780
Wrought
tacks
30
25
20
20
2.00
2.00
2.00
I .60
6.0
6.0
6.0
4.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
I
I
800
980
230
470
1.80
I.80
1.80
1.60
5.4
5.4
5.4
4.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
I
2
4
4
820
000
500
950
0)
Approx
No. of
Nails
per kg
Diameter
20
I5
IO
IO
Cut-lath
nails
(cut tacks)
Note - The number

guidance to the purchaser.
6. Insuestion
of nails per kilogram
and Manufacturers
is likely to vary to a considerable
extent, The figures given in co16 are intended
only for
Certificate
6.1 The purchaser or his authorized representative shall, where desired, be granted
finished goods prior to despatch from the manufacturers
works.
6.2 The manufacturer
shall supply
requirements
of this standard.
on request,
a certificate
stating
facilities for inspection
that the copper
nails comply
of
with the
6.2.1 The manufacturers certificate shall not be necessary if the package of nails bears IS1 Certification
(see 9.1.1) as the mark itself is a certificate of compliance.
Mark
6.3 The purchaser shallbe at liberty to reject any goods purporting

do not comply with any of the requirements
of this standard.
if they
to have been supplied to this standard
7. Packing
7.1 Unless specified otherwise.
2.5 kg.
copper nails shall be packed in cardboard
boxes, the net weight of each box being
8. Sample Size and Criterion for Conformity

8.1 Lot - In any consignment, all the packages of copper wire nails of the same type and size manufactured
the same time shall be grouped together to constitute a lot.
at
8.2 Selection of Packages and Nails

8.2.1 The number of packages to be selected at random from the lot shall depend on the size ofthe lot and shall
be in accordance with co1 1 and 2 of Table 2.
8.2.2 The number of nails to be selected at random from each packa@ shall depend upon the length of nails in
the package and shall be as given in co1 3 to 5 of Table 2.
8.3 Number of Tests - All the copper wire nails selected as in 8.2.2 shall be examined
(see 3), dimensions (see 4) and finish (see 5).
for manufacturing
defects
8.4 Criterion for Conformity - The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of this standard if
the number of nails failing in any one or more of the requirements
mentioned in 8.3 does not exceed the
corresponding
number mentioned in the appropriate
column, from co1 6 to 8, of Table 2.
9. Marking
9.1 All packages
ofnails shall be marked
a) Manufacturers
b) Type of nail,
132
with the following
information:
name or trade-mark,
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 725 - 1961
TABLE 2
Number of
Packages
to be
Selected
Number of
Packages
in the lot
(1)
(2)
2to
8
9,, 15
16 ,, 25
26 ,, 40
41 ,, 65
66 and above
2
3
4
5
7
10
Note -
The sampling
SAMPLE
SIZE AND CRITERION FOR CONFORMITY

( Clauses 8.2. I, 8.2.2 fnd 8.4 )
Number of Nails to be
Selected from each Package
if the length of the Nails is
Below
From
80 mm
Permissible
Number of
Defective Nails if the

Length of Nails is
)
25 mm
25 to
80 mm
and
Above
25 mm
25 to
80 mm
(3)
25
25
25
25
25
25
(4)
IO
IO
10
IO
IO
10
(5)
5
5
5
5
5
5
(6)
4
6
7
9
II
15
(7)
2
3
3
4
6
7
plan given here is such that lots with 4 percent
oi less defectives
would be- accepted most
80 mm
and
Above
(8)
of the time.
c) Size (length and dia or side of square of shank) of nail,

d) Finish of nail, and
e) Net weight of contents.
9.1.1 Each package
of nails may also be marked
with the ISI Certification
Mark.
Note - The use of ISI Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of the IndianStandards
Institution(Certification
Marks) Act, 1952
and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. Details of condtions, under which a licence for the use of the IS1 Certification Mark may be
granted to manufacturers
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :6730 - 1972
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
F.OR
FELT NAILS
1. Scope
of felt nails.
2. Material - Felt nails shall be manufactured

from mild steel wire conforming to IS : 280-1962 Specification
[or mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (revised) having a minimum ultimate fensile strength of
550 MPa and satisfying the bend test as in 7.1.
3. Dimensions
and Tolerances
Shall be as per Table
3.1 The eccentricity and ovality tolerances

14 percent of shank diameter, MUX.
1. Designation
1.
of the centre of the felt nails with respect of axis of the shank shall be
The felt nails shall be designated
of this standard.
Example:
Felt Nail 2 X 12 IS : 6730
- The felt nails shall be machine made and may have die marks and feeding knife
marks on the shank. They shall be uniformly circular in section, straight, free from wasters and shall have sharp
point. The heads shall be properly formed and concentric with the shank.
6. Finish
- The felt nails shall be supplied
plain finished.
7. Test
7.1 Bend T&t - Suitable test pieces of felt nails when cold shall not break or develop cracks, when doubled over
Either by pressure or by blows from a hammer until the internal radius is equal to the diameter of the test piece
and the sides are parallel.
6. Packing
The felt nails of different
sizes shall be packed in separate
containers.
6.1 The felt nails below 25 mm in length shall be packed in cardboard boxes and the net weight of each box shall
be 0.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags and the net weight of each bag shall be 50 kg.
8.2 The nails above 25 mm and up to 50 mm in length shall be packed in cardboard boxes and the net weight of
:ach box shall be 2.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags and the net weight of each bag shall be 50
kg.
and Criteria
for Conforrpity
similar conditions shall. be grouped together to constitute a lot.
under essentially
9.2 Selection of Nails - The number of nails to be selected at random from the lot shall depend on the size of the
lot and shall be in accordance with co1 1 and 2 of Table 2. The nails shall be selected from at least 25 percent of the
packages.
Characteristics
9.3.1 Number of tests and criteria for conformity

manufacturing
defects, dimensions and finish.
for
nails examined for characteristics
mentioned in 9.3.1 and found defective does not exceed the corresponding
acceptance number given in ~01.3 of Table 2.
134
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :6730 -1972
TABLE 1
DIMENSIONS
AND TOLERANCES
OF FELT NAILS
(SIZE 2.00 TO 3.55 mm)
( Clause 3 )
All dimensions
in millimetres.
e=lTO1*5d
FOR
d=2
TO 3.15 mm
D=3=ld
e=lTOl*Eid
FOR
2.80
3.15
3.55
f 0.06
f 0.06
f 0.06
9.2
10.4
11.0
Note - The number of nails per kilogram

intended only for guidance to the purchaser.
f 0.46
f 0.52
f 0.55
d=3*55
mm
40
1.5
570
20
1.0
1 030
25
1.2
810
30
1.2
660
40
1.5
385
45
1.8
330
50
f 2.,1
285
50
f2.1
230
extent. The figures given in the table are
IS :6730 - 1972
TABLE
SCALE
OF SAMPLING
(Clauses
Approximate
Number of Nails
in the Lot
Visual and Dimensional

Characteristics
A
FOR CONFORMITY
Bend Test
Number of Nails
to be Selected
Permissible
Number of
Defective Nails
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
32
50
80
125
200
5
7
10
14
21
8
13
20
32
50
0
0
0
(1)
Upto
1001 to
3 001 to
10 001 to.
35 001 and
AND CRITERIA
9.2, 9.3.2, 9.4.1 and 9.4.2 )
1000
3000
10000
35 000
above
e Sub-sample
Size
Number of
Defective Nails
1
2
Note - The sampling plan accepts the lots containing 7 percent or less defectives in respect of visual and dimensional
characteristics
more than 95 percent of the times. In the case of bend test the lot containing I .5 percent or less defectives will be
9.4 Bend Test

9.4.1 Number of tests and criteria for conformity - The number of nails to be selected for carrying out bend
test shall be according to co1 4 of Table 2. These nails shall be selected from those already inspected according to
9.3.1 and found satisfactory.
9.4.2 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of bend test if the number
to pass this test does not exceed the corresponding
as conforming
10. Marking
All packages
a)
Manufacturers
b)
The type of nail;
name or trade-mark,
c)
The size (shank diameter)
d)
to the requirements
Marking
with the following
of nails failing
information;
if any;
Details available
EXPLANATORY
with the Indian
Standards
Institution.
NOTE
The above standard has been prepared subsequent to the decision to revise IS : 723-1961 Specification for
mild steel wire nails (revised), splitting it into six individual standards each covering only one type of nail. In this
standard the following additional features have been incorporated:
136
a)
Tolerances
for eccentricity
b)
The sampling
4 to 7; and
c)
Provision
and ovality of nail heads have been specified;
plan has been suitably modified to permit allowable
percentage
for extra large head felt nails have been deleted.

HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 6732 - 1972
Indian Standqrd
SPECIFICATION
FOR
DOUBLE POINT NAILS
.
Scope -
of steel double
point nails.
. Material - Nails shall be manufactured

from mild steel wire conforming to IS : 280-1962 Specification for
lild steel wire for general engineering purposes (revised) having a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 550
APa and satisfying bend test given in 7.1.
. Dimensions
and Tolerances
The dimensions
and tolerances
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

All
of the nails shall be according
to Table
1.
OF DOUBLE POINT NAILS (SIZE 1.80 TO 2.50 mm)
dimensions in millimetres.
WI&-L
e = 1 TO 1.5 d
1. Designation
-The
double point nails shall be designated
-Y
by the size, length and the number ofthis standard.
Example:
A double
point nail of size 1.80 mm and length 35 mm shall be designated
as:
Nail 1.80 X 35 IS : 6732

i. General Requirements - The nails shall be machine made and may have die marks and feeding knife marks
)n the shank. They shall be uniformly circular in section, straight, free from wasters and shall have sharp point.
i. Finish
The nails shall be supplied
plain finished.
1. Test
1.1 Bend Test - Suitable test pieces of dpuble point nails when cold shall not break or develop cracks, when
doubled over either by pressure or by blows from a hammer until the internal radius is equal to the diameter of
.he test piece and the sides are parallel.
8. Packing
8.1 Nails of different sizes shall be packed in different containers. Nails shall be packed in cardboard boxes and
the net weight of each box shall be 2.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags, and the net weight of each
bag shall be 50 kg.
FASTENERS-PART
137
IS : 6732 - 1972
9. Scale of Sampling and Criteria for Conformity
9.1 Lot - In any consignment all. the packages of nails of the same type and size manufactured
under essentially
9.2 Selection of Samples - The number of nails to be selected at random from the lot shall depend on the size of
the lot and shall be in accordance with co1 1 and 2 of Table 2. The nails shall be selected from at least 25 percent of
the packages.
Characteristics
9.3.1 Number of tests and criteria for conformity manufacturing

for
9.4 Bend Test
as conforming
TABLE
SCALE
to the requirements
OF SAMPLING
AND CRITERIA
FOR CONFORMITY

Characteristics
Approximate
Number of Nails
in the Lot
of nails failing
Bend Test
a
Number of Nails
to be Selected
Permissible
Number of
Defective Nails
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
32
50
80
125
200
5
7
10
14
21
8
13
20
32
50
0
0
0
(1)
Permissible
Number of
Defective Nails
Sub-sample
Size
.!
up
1001
3 001
IO 001
35 001
to
to
to
to
and
1000
3000
10 000
35 000
above
I
2
Note - The sampling plan accepts the lots containing 7 percent or !ess defectives in respect of visual and dimensional
characteristics
10. Marking -
All packages
a)
Manufacturers
name or trade-mark,
b)
The type of nail;
c)
Size (shank
d)
diameter)
with the following
information:
if any;
and length; and
10.1 ISI Certification Marking -
Details available
EXPLANATORY
with the Indian
Standards
Institution.
NOTE
The standard was originally a part of IS : 723-1972 Specification for steel countersunk
head wire nails
(second revision). Subsequent
to the revision of this standard, individual standards have been prepared for
different types of nails. In the present revision the following changes have been made:
138
a)
The name has been changed
b)
The sampling
to 7 percent.
c)
Provision
from round
wire dowels with double
plan has been modified to permit allowable percentage
for galvanized
points to double
point nails.
1
of defective nails from 4 percent
finish has been deleted and plain finish has been specified.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 6733 - 1972
.
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
WALL AND ROOFING NAILS
1. Scope -
of wall and roofing
nails.
2. Material - Nails shall be manufactured

from St42 and St50 steel conforming to IS : 1570-1961 Schedules for
wrought steels for general engineering purposes and satisfying bend test as in 7.1.
3. Dimensions
and Tolerances
TABLE 1
These shall be as given in Table
DIMENSIONS
AND TOLERANCES
1.
OF WALL AND ROOFING NAILS
(SIZE 4.00 TO 6.30 mm)

( Clause 3 )
All dimensions
in millimetres.
&
e-
-eI
---
h
d@
t
II= 2*&d
e=l
Al
e=l
TO 1*5d
TOlaSd
Eccentricity and ovality

diameter, MUX.
of the centre of the nail head from axis of shank shall be 14 percent
HANDBOOK
FASTENERS-PART
ON INDUSTRIAL
of shank
139
IS : 6733 - 1972
4. Designation
standard.
The wall and roofing
nails shall be designated
of this
Examples:
Wall Nail 4 X 30 IS : 6733
Roofing
Nail 5.6 X 50 IS : 6733
on the shank. They shall be uniformly circular in section, straight, free from wasters and shall have sharp point.
The heads shall be properly formed and concentric with the shank.
6. Finish -
The nails shall be supplied
plain finished.
7. Test
7.1 Bend Test - Suitable test pieces of nails when cold shall not break or crack when doubled over either by
pressure or by blows from a hammer until the internal radius is equal to the diameter of the test piece and sides are
parallel.
8. Packing
Nails of different
containers.
box shall be 2.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags and net weight of each bag shall be 50 kg.
and Criteria
for Conformity
under essentially
9.2 Selection of Nails - The number of nails to be selected at random from the lot shall depend on the size of the
lot and shall be in accordance with co1 1 and 2 of Table 2. The nails shall be selected from at least 25 percent of the
packages.
9.3 Visual and Dimensional Characteristics
9.3.1 Number of tests and criteria for conformity manufacturing
for
9.4 Bend Test
TABLE
SCALE
OF SAMPLING
AND CRITERIA
FOR CONFORMITY
( Clauses 9.2, 9.3.2, 9.4.1 and9.4.2)

Approximate
Number of Nails
in the Lot
(1)
up to
1001to
1000
3000
3 001 to 10 000
10001 to 35 000
35 001 and above

Characteristics
6
/
3
Number of Nails
Permissible
to be Selected
Number of
Defective Nails
Bend Test
Sub-sample
Size
Permissible
Number of
Defective Nails
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
32
50
80
125
200
5
7
10
I4
21
8
13
20
32
50
0
0
0
I
2
characteristics
140
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :6733
as conforming
10. Marking
All packages
a)
Manufacturers
name or trade-mark,
b)
The type of nail;
c)
d)
10.1 IS1 Certification
to the requirements
Marking
with the following
- 1972
of nails failing
information:
if any;
and length of nail; and
Details available
EXPLANATORY
with the Indian
Standards
Institution.
NOTE
The above standard has been prepared subsequent to the decision to revise IS : 723-1961 Specification for
mild steel wire nails (revised), splitting it into six individual standards each covering only one type of nail. In this
4 Tolerances for eccentricity and ovality of nail heads have been specified;
b) Raw material has been specified as St42 or St50 steel instead of mild steel according to IS : 280-1962;
and
c) The sampling plan has been suitably modified to permit allowable percentage of defective nails to 7
from 4.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
141
IS :6734 - 1972
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CUT LATH AND LATH NAILS
1. Scope -
Requirements
of cut lath and lath nails made of steel.
2. Material - The nails shall be manufactured

from mild steel wire conforming
for mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (revised)having
a minimum
MPa and satisfying the bend test given in 7.1.
3. Dimensions
and Tolerances
3.1 The eccentricity

be as given below:
Shall be as given in Table
and ovality tolerances
ultimate tensile strength of 550
1.
of the centre of the nail head with respect to the axis of the shank shall
2 2 mm; 12 percent
of shank diameter,
MUX.
< 2 mm; 14 percent
of shank diameter,
MUX.
4. Designation
The nails shall be designated
by the size, length and number
of this standard.
Examples:
Cut Lath Nail 1.80 X 15 IS : 6734
Lath Nail
2.00 X 40 IS : 6734
on the shank. They shall be uniformly circular in section, straight, free from wasters and shall have sharp points.
The heads shall be properly formed and concentric with the shank.
6. Finish -
Nails shall be supplied
plain finished.
7. Test
7.1 Bend Test - Suitable test pieces of nails when cold shall not break or develop cracks, when doubled over
either by pressure or by blows from a hammer until the internal radius is equal to the diameter of the test piece
and the sides are parallel.
8. Packing
Nails of different
containers.
8.1 Nails below 25 mm in length shall be packed in cardboard boxes and the net weight of each box shall be 0.5
kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags and the net weight of each bag shall be 50 kg.
box shall be 2.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags, and the net weight of each bag shall be 50 kg.
under essentially
9.2 Selection of Samples - The number of nails to be selected at random from the lot shall depend on the size of
the lot and shall be in accordance with co1 I and 2 of Table 2. The nails shall be selected from at least 25 percent of
the packages.
Characteristics
9.3.1 Number of tests and criteria for conformity

manufacturing
All the nails selected BS in 9.2 shall be examined
for
142
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 6734
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
AND
TOLERANCES
(SIZE
OF CUT LATH
AND
LATH
- 1972
NAILS
1.25 TO 2.24 mm)

( Clause 3 )
All dimensions
in millimetres.
D=3d
CUT LATH NAIL
D=28d
e=l
TO 1*5d
LATH NAIL
Size d
(Shank
Basic
Head Diameter
Diameter)
1 Tolerance
Basic
Approximate
Length
Tolerance
Number
Basic
of Nails
Cut Lath
1 Tolerance
perkg
Lath
percent
I
1.25
1 i
0.04
3.8
f 0.19
10
0.24
0.27
1 i 1.0
9 770
4100
2 240
1.0
10
1.0
15
1.0
* 0.4
Note -
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
20
f 1.0
20
f 1.0 I
2 310
I
370
5.6
The number of nails per kilogram
table are intended
0.25
3 280
only for guidance
extent. The figures given in the
to the purchaser.
FASTENERS-PART
143
IS : 6734 - 1972
TABLE
SCALE
OF SAMPLING
( Clauses
Approximate
Number
AND
CRITERIA
9.2, 9.3.2, 9.4.1 and
9.4.2
FOR
CONFORMITY
For Visual and Dimensional
of Nails
For Bend Test
Chaqcteristics
in the Lot
35 001
Permissible
Number of
Defective Nails
Number of
Defective Nails
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
32
50
80
125
200
5
7
10
14
21
8
13
20
32
50
0
0
0
1
2
(1)
Upto
1001to
3 001 to
10001 to
rSub-sample
Size
to be Selected
1000
3000
10ooo
35 000
and above
characteristics
9.4 Bend
Test
9.4.1 Number oftests and criteriafor conformity - The number of nails to be selected for carrying out bend
test shall be according to co1 4 Table 2. These nails shall be selected from those already inspected according to
as conforming
10. Marking
All packages
a)
Manufacturers
b)
The type of nail,
with the following
information:
name or trade-mark,
c)
Size (shank
d)
10.1 IS/ CertzjYcation
to the requirements
of nails failing
diameter)
Marking
Details available
EXPLANATORY
with the Indian
Standards
Institution.
NOTE
Subsequent
to the decision to revise IS : 723-1961 Specification for mild steel wire nails (revised),
splitting it into six individual standards each covering only one type of nail, the above standard has been
prepared. In this the following additional features have been incorporated:
144
a)
Tolerances
b)
The sampling plan has been suitably modified to permit allowable

for eccentricity
and ovality
of nail heads have been specified.
HANDBOOK
percentage
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 6738 - 1972
Indian StaFdard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PINS AND LOST HEAD
PANEL
Scope -- Covers the requirements
NAILS
of panel pins and lost head nails made of steel.
Material - Panel pins and lost head nails shall be manufactured from mild steel wire conforming to IS : 2807
52 Specification for mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (revised) having a minimum ultimate
sile strength of 550 MPa and satisfying the bend test given in 7.1.
Dimensions
and Tolerances
rABLE
As given in Table
DIMENSIONS
1.
AND TOLERANCES
OF PANEL
All dimensions
in millimetres.
PINS AND LOST HEAD
D=l*4d
e=l TO 1*5d
d5
d>
1.4
Nom
Head Diameter
Length
Tolerance
Basic
Approximate
Number of Bright Nails
P er 1g
Tolerance
Basic
Tolerance
1.00
1.25
1.40
1.40
*
f
f
f
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
1.4
1.8
2.0
2.0
f
f
*
f
0.07
0.09
0.10
0.10
12
15
20
25
f 1.0
1.60
1.60
2.t.Y
2.80
+
f
*
f
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.06
2.2
2.2
2.8
3.9
f
f
f
f
0.11
0.11
0.14
0.20
30
40
50
60
f
f
*
f
3.15
4.00
4.00
=t 0.06
f 0.06
ic 0.06
4.4
6.3
6.3
f 0.22
f 0.32
f 0.32
70
80
100
Panel Pins
10
6
3
3
f 1.0
* 1.0
f 1.2

4. Designation
this standard.
780
380
960
080
1 890
I 580
770
400
f 2.6
f 2.6
f 3.4
200
95
76
i
-I-
and ovality tolerances
Lost Head
Nails
1.2
1.5
2.1
2.1
Note - The number of pins or nails per kilogram is likely to vary to a considerable
i n the table are intended only for guidance to the purchaser.
1 The eccentricity
as given below:
1.4
Lost Head Nail
Panel Pin
Size d
(Shank Diameter)
NAILS
extent. The 1igure given
of the centre of the nail head with respect to the axis of the shank shall
> 2 mm; maximum

< 2 mm; maximum
12 percent of shank diameter,

14 percent of shank diameter,
The panel nails and the lost head nails shall be designated
MUX
Max
by the size. length and the number of
Example:
Panel Pin
1.4 X 25 IS : 6738
Lost Head Nail 1.6 X 40 IS : 6738
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
145
IS :6738 - 1972
5. General Requirements - The pins and nails shall be machine made and may have die marks and feeding knife
marks pn the shank. They shall be uniformly circular in section, straight, free from wasters and shall have sharp
point. The heads shall be properly formed and concentric with the shank.
6. Finish -
The pins and nails shall be supplied
plain finished.
7. Test
7.1 Bend Test - Suitable test pieces of pins or nails when cold shall not break or develop cracks, when doubled
over either by pressure or by blows from a hammer, until the internal radius is equal to the diameter of the test
piece and the sides are parallel.
8. Packing
The pins and nails of different
sizes and types shall be pacKed in separate
containers.
8.1 The pins and nails including 25 mm in length and below shall be packed in cardboard boxes andthe net
weight of each box shall be 0.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags and the net weight of each bag
shall be 50 kg.
8.2 The pins and nails above 25 mm and below 80 mm in length shall be packed in cardboard boxes and the net
weight of each box shall be 2.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags, and the net weight of each bag
shall be 50 kg.
8.3 The nails of 80 mm and above in length shall be packed in wrappings of double gunny bags, the weight of the
each package being 15 kg. The pins and nails may also be supplied in bituminized canvas or hessian bags, the net
weight of each package shall be 50 kg.
9.1 Lot - In any consignment all the packages of pins or nails of the same type and size manufactured
essentially similar conditions shall be grouped together to constitute a lot.
under
9.2 S$ection of Pins or Nails - The number of pins or nails to be selected at random from the lot shall depend
on the size of the lot and shall be in accordance with co1 I and 2 of Table 2. The pins or nails shall be selected from
at least 25 percent of the packages.
9.3 Visual and Dimensional Characteristics
9.3.1 Number of tests and criteriafor conformity - All the pins or nails selected as in 9.2 shall be examined
manufacturing
for
pins or nails, examined for characteristics
mentioned in 9.3.1 and found defective, does not exceed the
corresponding
TABLE 2
SCALE OF SAMPLING
AND CRITERIA
FOR CONFORMITY
( Clauses 9.2, 9.3.2, 9.4.1 and 9.4.2 )

Approximate
Number of Pins or
Nails in the Lot

Characteristics
b
I
Number of Pins or
Permissible
Nails to be Selected
Number of
Defective Pins
Bend Test
Sub-sample
Size
or Nails
(1)
Upto
1000
I 001to 3 000
3001 to 10000
IO 001 to 35 000
35 001 and above
Permissible
Number of
Defective Pins
or Nails
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
32
50
80
125
200
5
7
10
14
21
8
13
20
32
50
0
0
0
1
2
characteristics
9.4 Bend Test

9.4.1 Number of tests and criteriafor conformity-The
number of pins or nails to be selected for carrying out
bend test shall be according to co1 4 of Table 2. These nails or pins shall be selected from those already inspected
according to 9.3.1 and found satisfactory.
146
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :6738 - 1972
9.4.2 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of bend test if the number ot pins or nails
failing to pass this test does not exceed the corresponding
as conforming
to the requirements
10. Marking
of pins or nails shall be marked
with the following
a)
All packages
Manufacturers
name or trade-mark,
b)
The type of pin or nail;
c)
d)
Marking

information:
if any;
and length of pin or nail; and
Details available
with the Indian
EXPLANATORY
Standards
Institution.
NOTE
This standard has been prepared subsequent to the decision to revise IS : 723-1961 Specification for mild
steel wire nails (revised), splitting it into six individual standards each covering only one type of nail. In this
a)
Tolerances
b)
The sampling plan has been suitably

HANDBOOK
for eccentricity
ON INDUSTRIAL
and ovality
FASTENERS-PART
of nail heads have been specified; and
modified to permit allowable
percentage
147
SECTION D
Keys, Keyways and Cotters
IS : 2048 - 1983
_.
____ -4
_
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PARALLEL
KEYS AND KEYWAYS
( Second Revision )
1. Scope -
Covers the dimensions
2. Types -
The keys shall be of the following
and tolerances
for parallel
keys and keyways.
types:
Type A Type B Type C Type D

Type E
Type F
Type G
Type H
TypeJ
Keys with both ends round.

Keys with both ends square.
Keys with both ends round with hole for one retaining screw (for sizes 8 X 7 and upwards and
for key lengths above the stepped line in Table 4).
- Keys with both ends square with hole for one retaining screw (for sizes 8 X 7 and upwards and
for key lengths above the stepped line in Table 4).
-a)
Keys with both ends round with holes for two retaining screws (for sizes 8 X 7 and 10 X 8
and for key lengths below the stepped line in Table 4)
b) Additionally provided with tapped hole for one or two jacking screws for sizes 12 X 8 and
upwards
- a) Keys with both ends square with holes for two retaining screws (for sizes 8 X 7 and 10 X 8
and for key lengths below the stepped line in Table 4).
b) Additionally provided with tapped hole for one or two jacking screws for sizes 12 X 8 and
upwards.
- Keys with both ends square with chamfer and hole for one retaining screw.
- Keys with%oth ends square with chamfer and holes for two retaining screws.
- Keys with both ends square with chamfer and hole for one spring dowel sleeve
Note - Types A, C and E are meant for machine tools application also.
3. Dimensions
3.1 Keys -
Dimensions
3.1.1 Retaining
3.2 Keywuys
3.3 Preferred
for keys are given in Table
screws, jacking
Dimensions
Length
4. Designation -
1 read with Fig. 1.
screws and spring dowel sleeves for keys are given in Table 2.
for keyways are given in Table 3.
and Weight of Keys -
Preferred
length and weight of keys is given in Table 4.
A parallel key of Type A, width 12 mm, height 8 mm and length 50 mm shall be designated
Parallel
as:
Key A 12 X 8 X 50
4.1 If keys of Types E and F from 12 X 8 size upwards are required to be supplied without holes for jacking
screws (OS), this shall be stated when ordering. In this case the designation for a key of Type E, width 12 mm,
height 8 mm and length 50 mm shall be as follows:
Parallel
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
Key EoS 12 X 8 X 50
151
1s :2048 - 1983
h
TYPE
SECTION
XX
TYPE
SECTION
TYPE
SECTION
XX
. SECTION
YY
YY
t-
TYPE
SECTION
22
SECTION
22
(b)
(a)
TYPE
[yY$=Yq
(a)
TYPE
[ii?
TYPE
(b)
s50
TYPE
r
!T!
3
t--
SECTION
VV
TYPE J
Note - Types A, C and E are meant for machine tools application also.
FIG. I DIMENSIONS AND TYPES OF KEYS (see Table I)
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :2048 - 1983
TABLE
1 DIMENSIONS
FOR KEYS
( Clause 3. I and Fig. I )
All dimensions
lbIToFblh
Tol on h
in millimetres.
Min
0
-- 0.025
0
0.030
0.090
0
0.110
0
0.160
ON INDUSTRIAL
Min
Max
Min
MU
0.16
0.25
20
0.16
0.25
36
0.16
0.25
45
IO
45
0.25
0.40
10
56
12
56
0.25
0.40
14
70
I6
70
0.25
0.40
18
90
20
90
0.40
0.60
22
I10
25
I10
0.40
0.60
28
140
32
140
160
3.5
0.40
0.60
36
160
40
0.40
0.60
45
I80
45
I80
4.5
0.40
0.60
50
200
50
200
0.60
0.80
56
220
56
220
5:5
0.60
0.80
63
250
63
250
5.5
0.60
0.80
70
280
70
250
0.60
0.80
320
80
250
0.60
0.80
90
360
90
250
1.00
1.20
100
400
100
250
1.00
1.20
I10
400
110
80
250
1.60
2.00
200
16
2.50
3.00
220
400
18
2.50
3.00
250
400
20
2.50
3.00
280
400
14
Note - Keys with b = 4 to 40 are meant for machine

*To1 on h : Square Section h9; Rectangular
Section hl 1.
HANDBOOK
MUX
Range of Key
Length
(for Machine)
Tools Only)
6.5
0
0.130
Range of Key Length

I
FASTENERS-PART
tools application
400
also.
153
IS :2048 - 1983
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
FOR RETAINING
SCREWS, JACKING
DOWEL SLEEVES FOR KEYS
( Cloftse 3.1.1 )
All dimensions
SCREWS
HOLE FOR JACKING
50 X 28
! 14
1 20
( Ml2
1 16
--
+d,
HOLE FOR SPRING

DOWEL SLEEVE
SCREW
SPRING
in millimetres.
--b,/)HOLE FOR RETAINING SCREW
AND
8.3 1 16
Ml2
! 17
MI2
I7
Ml2
17
Ml6
21
Ml6
21
20
28
30
M20 X 50
25 x 40
20
28
30
M20 X 55
25 x 50
I
I
Note - Retaining screw and jacking screws are meant for machine tools applications also.
*Dimensions for countersinks and counterbores:
Part 1 Countersinks first revision).
tRetaming
screw: chees; head screw conforming to IS : 1366-1982 Specification for slotted cheese head screws (second revision) or
hexagon socket head cap screw conforming to IS : 2269-1981 Specification for hexagon socket head cap screws (second revision).
fDowel sleeve conforming to IS : 5988-1970 Specification for spring dowel sleeves (light and heavy patterns) for use in foundries.
154
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
1S : 204S -1983
TABLE
DIMENSION
( cl..,.
$ FOR
32 )
KEYWAYS
All dtmenstons in mdlimetres
t-=
/
m
DETAIL
Ring. of
Shafl Dia
d
Kq
Keywy
Kqway
bXh
=--r== II
R.nmng
2X2
10
3x3
31
10
12
4x 4
17
5x5
17
22
6x6
22
30
8X7
30
38
10X8
10
38
44
12X8
12
44
50
[4X9
14
50
58
16 X 10
16
58
65
18X11
18
65
75
20X
12
20
75
85
22X
14
22
85
95
25 x
14
25
+ 0,020
+ O 078
+ 0.030
Sh;z
).C06
3,031
[.0
1.2
~
+ 0.098
+ 0.040
0
0036
+ 0.043
0
+0.120
+ 0.050
0
-0.043
3.0[2
).042
+ 0.0150
0.0150
0
0.030
+ O.O36
0
1.8
+0.1
0
+ 0,0180
0,0180
0.015
0,051
+ 0.021 5
0,0215
0.018
<1.06I
:&
0
0.052
0
0.062
-0,022
0.0260
0.074
O.O26
11,088
+ 00310
0.0310
o
0.074
+ 0,0370
0.0370
,440
[5S0
380
80X40
90
x 45
I04X50
90
160
:08
::::
o
0.087
+ 0.0435
0.0435
0.037
0.124
0.16
0.25
3.8
0,22
44
1.1
+0.1
1.3
0.16
0,25
5.4
1.7
3.3
0.25
040
61
2. I
0.25
0.40
2.1
0.25
0.40
6.5
2.6
0,25
0.40
7.5
3.3
3.8
4,3
+ 0.2
+ 0.2
+
~
9,0
2.6
+ 0.2
0
T0,2
;:
;:
5.4
0,40
0.60
(0
41
5.4
0.40
0.60
!0
4 I
6.4
0.40
0.60
II
5.1
7.4
0.40
0.60
13
0.70
I,Oil
13.7
6.5
94
0.70
Loo
14
82
15,0
10.4
0.70
1.00
0.70
I 00
1.20
1.643
8.4
I 1.4
12.4
22.0
[44
(5,4
d~j
;
+03
mo
20.0
31.0
195
I 20
1,60
t 20
1.60
200
2.s0
20
25(3
200
2. so
!
f
~
+0.1
0
1.7
130
120
:7
80
/
0.!6
0.08
0.16
0.16
0.08
3.3
5.5
0.032
0.106
o.06-
2.8
4.0
0.0260
+0.1
0
3,5
330
To!
on
f,
+0,3
380
r:
0.16
J--_lq
ToI
0.
23
6.0
+0.180
+ 0080
!,
Max
30
+0,149
+ 0.065
[,4
1.8
5.0
+ 0.052
0
Tools
,,9
2.5
+ 0.030
0
bfin
1,
1,
+ 0.0643
for Wacbie
Applicw,on
Tol
on
1,
1,
fit
Hub
DIO
+ 0.025
To1
ml
lb
ToI o b
Shaft
H9
12
AT A
IS :2048-1983
TABLE
LENOTH
PREFERRED
AND
WEIGHT
OF KEYS
( C6W.X 3,3 )
Preferred
Length
Key (b X h), mm
(0 mm
3x3
2X2
4X5
5x5
8X7
6x6
[OX8
12X8
14X9
16X
10
18X11
20 x1222x14
*Weight
t
0.188
0.423
0.251
0.565
10
0.314
12
0.377
14
0440
16
0,502
a707
1.26
1.95
0,848
I 51
2.35
0.989
1.76
2.75
3.94
t.13
2.01
3.14
4.52
1.27
2.26
3.53
5,09
7,93
2.5(
3.92
5.65
8.80
22
1.55
2.76
4,32
6.22
25
1.77
3.14
4.91
1.07
9.67
13.8
{!.0
3,52
5.50
7.9[
12.3
17.6
21.1
4.02
6.28
9.04
14,1
20. !
24, I
254
4.52
63;
7.06
10.2
,.
f..=
1,.,
5.65
8.83
. ...!...
9.81
11.0
15.8
!,,
226
27. i
3S.6
25. I
30 I
39.6
lY.8
28.3
33.9
445
56.5
!..
-- {
IL.
220
31.4
37.7
49.5
628
77.7
24.6
35.2
42.2
55,4
70.3
87.0
10b
!7.8
27.7
39.6
47.5
62.3
79. I
97.9
I 19
152
19.8
30.8
44.0
52.8
-~
8E.O
lo9
132
169
192
50.2
124
151
193
220
35.2
90
!:
39.6
,,V,
,W
II
i:
no
160
~~,)
..
79.1
60.3
56.5
67.8
89.o
7<.
ox 0
829
94.2
100
63 X 31
70 x 36
80X40
90 x 45
too x so
10b
140
170
2[8
247
3{7
407
---
1<$
I 88
242
275
352
452
565
109
138
[71
,.,
.. .
9..
...
.,?
. .
.
387
497
622
124
157
[94
235
302
343
4..,
4.
./..
138
176
218
.27s
..
.7ss
..
f97
.-
158
201
249
387
440
563
113
226
! 7A
I
;,
,1
32
281
.-.
----
180
200
.,,
..
69.1
15.8
80
I40
56
14.1
50 x 28
L,..
70
125
25
1.98
15.7
226
50
45
32
56
43X22
!
I
28
36x20
1,41
32x[8
0.565
45
28 x 16
0.628
14
18
36
lot
20
..
.:,
25
for KcYs~TYw B. kgl 1 OQO PICCCS(ApprOx)
PM
..
,
I
I
!1
301
,.
6T3
---
,
1
723
/..
..<
791
!
760
,
,.,
I
I
967
904
.. .
1110
I
.
1
. .. .
lrul
I 240
1410
I
,
I 54J
I 764
2080
2750
2s0
339
435
495
633
8!4
1020
1240
I 590
1980
2340
3[1
,377
484
550
703
Q04
! [30
I 380
I 770
~ ~~
*W
3 06Q
414
53>
504
-74
995
I 240
\ j~o
I 940
2 420
2 860
3 570
4 !Xq
644
687
880
1130
i411J
1 730
2210
2750
3250
3830
4 ;50
b 280
7 SW
985
I 270
1580
I 930
2470
3080
3fYo2
4 29U
5320
7030
8820
1440
I 810
2210
2820
3510
4 170
4903
60911
7930
10100
12600
1 630
2040
2480
3 180
3950
4690
5 <10
6850
9030
I I 350
14200
~ ~m
2760
3530
4400
5200
6 r20
7 61X3
10040
12 ioo
15700
593
85.3
250
280
769
1 130
320
360
400
38043
I
5 5?0
Ilwm
Wmght
deducrmn
. . T.,- r.,
.,
,,,!.
Now
For
0015
I
0.045
0.108
For rnach~.e tools applcwon
calcuiaw.s
of wetgh!$, d.nsIIY
0.211
!
0.364
0,755
!
1,35
I
2.97
1.94
!
(W keys (h X h), 4 X 4 m 40 X 22 pref.erred length (/) ranges (mm
of wed taken as 785 K/cmi.
6.WI
431
1
10 m 250.
8.09
1
11.4
IL
21.1
147
I
31.1
,
43,7
,
118
!69
214
I
433
298
I
615
844
IS : 2048 - 1983
5. Tolerances
on Length of Keys and Keyways

Length of Key
Tolerance on
mm
Key Length
Keyway Length
mm
mm
up to 28
0.2
+ 0.2
32 to 80
-- 0.3
+ 0.3
90 and above
+ 0.5
0.5
1
6. Error of Symmetry
and Parallelism
d
N9
1 Diameter of
Above
Shaft
up to
b
I
10
,
1 12
/
12
17
22
30
38
44
50
58
65
75
85
95
17
22
30
38
44
50
58
65
75
85
95
110
10
j 12
14
16
18
20
22
7. Material of Key -
130
130
150
0.1
I10
Steel of tensile strength
0.16
I
1
0.2
, 25
28
0.3
not less than 600 MPa shall be used as material
32 ,
/
36
0.4
for key.
8. Packing
8.1 Packages
shall be made in such a way that keys are protected
against
mechanical
damage
in transit.
9. Marking
9.1 Such marks as may be specified by the purchaser shall be marked on the top or bottom surface of the parallel
keys or in the packaging containing keys.
9.2 ISI Certification Marking -
Details available
EXPLANATORY
with the Indian
Standards
Institution.
NOTE
Parallel keys and keyways were formerly covered in IS : 2048-1975 Specification for parallel keys and
keyways Cfirst revision). However, parallel keys and keyways meant for machine tools Gere covered in IS : 27 IO1975 Specification for parallel keys and keyways for machine tools (first revision).
The dimensions and tolerances of keys of sizes 4 X 4 to 40 X 22 covered in IS : 2048- 1975 were exactly the
same as those covered in IS : 2710-1973, which specification was applicable to machine tools. Only the range of
.key lengths and dimensions of keyways differed for machine tool applications.
In the present revision of IS : 2048, the requirements of keys for machine tools including the range of key
lengths and details of keyway have been incorporated.
In addition, the original range of sizes 2 X 2 to 100 X 50 as
also the Types A to J have been retained.
This version
HANDBOOK
of the standard
ON INDUSTRIAL
(IS : 2048-1983) shall supersede
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 2710-1975 after its publication.

159
IS :2291- 1981
Indian
Standard
SPECIl?ICATION
FOR
TANGENTIAL
KEYS AND KEYWAYS
( Second
I Scope nd hub.
Specifies dimensions
.l It also gives relation
and tolerances
Revision )
for tangential
which should be observed
keys and their corresponding
between diameter
of shaft and section
keyways in shaft
of key.
, Dimensions
Note - The length I is a function of the design in question; its value must always be indicated.
:hosen so as to be 10 to 15 percent greater than the length of the hub.
160
HANDBOOK
It is recommended
ON INDUSTRIAL
that this length be
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 2291- 1981
All dimensions
Shaft
Dia-
meter
d+
-r
+
Key
-I--
Thickness
t
iomi
nal
Tolerance
h,l
Calculated
width
in millimetres.
Chamfer
S
Min
Keyway
In the hub
r!
Max
Nominal
oleonce
Drepth
In the shaft
Calculated
width
Radius
R
nal
Tole*ante
In the
hub
In the
shaft
bz$
Max
Min
19.3
19.8
20.1
21.0
22.5
19.6
20.2
20.5
21.4
22.8
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
23.2
24.0
24.8
25.6
27.8
23.5
24.4
25.2
26.0
28.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
ht
b**
60
63
65
70
71
7
7
7
7
8
19.3
19.8
20.1
21.0
22.5
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
7
7
7
7
8
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
8.3
75
80
85
90
95
8
8
8
8
9
23.2
24.0
24.8
25.6
27.8
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
8
8
8
8
9
8.3
8.3
8.3
x.3
9.3
100
110
120
125
130
9
9
10
10
10
28.6
30.1
33.2
33.9
34.6
0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.8
0.8
1.2
1.2
1.2
9
9
10
10
10
9.3
9.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
28.6
30.1
33.2
33.9
34.6
29.0
30.6
33.6
34.4
35. 1
0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.4
0.4
0.7
0.7
0.7
140
150
160
170
180
II
II
12
12
12
37.7
39. I
42.1
43.5
44.9
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
II
--I&
I2
12
11.4
11.4
-Gr
12.4
12.4
37.7
39.1
42. I
43.5
44.9
38.3
39.7
42.8
44.2
45.9
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
190
200
220
240
250
260
I4
14
16
I6
18
18
49.6
51.0
57.1
59.9
64.6
66.0
1.0
1.0
1.6
I.6
1.6
1.6
1.2
1.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
14
14
16
16
I8
18
14.4
14.4
16.4
16.4
18.4
18.4
49.6
51.0
57.1
59.9
64.6
66.0
50.3
51.7
57.8
60.6
65.3
66.7
1.0
I.0
I.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
0.7
0.7
I.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
280
3QO
320
340
360
20
20
22
22
26
72. I
74.8
81.0
83.6
93.2
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
20
20
22
22
26
20.4
20.4
22.4
22.4
26.4
72.1
74.8
81.0
83.6
93.2
72.8
75.5
81.6
84.3
93.8
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
95.9
98.6
108.2
110.9
112.3
113.5
123.1
125.9
136.7
140.8
153.1
157.1
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
,3.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
26
26
30
30
30
30
34
34
38
38
42
42
95.9
98.6
108.2
110.9
112.3
113.6
123.1
125.9
136.7
96.6
99.3
108.8
111.6
112.9
114.3
123.8
126.6
137.4
141.5
153.8
157.8
2.5
2.5
%O
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
0
- 0.090
0.2
t 0.2
0
380
400
420
440
450
460
480
500
- 0.110
0
- 0.13c
26
26
30
30
30
30
34
34
38
38
42
42
0
- 0.16(
0
0.3
26.4
26.4
30.4
30.4
30.4
30.4
34.4
34.4
38.4
38.4
42.4
42.4
+ 0.3
0
1
j
j
j
17.1
*For intermediate shaft diameters, the dimensions of keys and keyways given for the diameter immediately above should be adopted.
For shaft diameters greater than 630 mm, the dimensions of the keys and the keyways should be determined as follows:
t = 0.068 d
t, = I
12 = t + 0.4 mm (for t 45 mm)
= t + 0.5 mm (for t 45 mm)
h=tX(d-t)
h,=b=tX(d-t)
hz = ts X (d - tz)
s and R according to the table of the note below.
**The width b is a function of the widths bl and b2 of the milled keyways, respectively in the hub and in the shaft. Its theoretical value is
equal to t X (d - t).
tThe width
calculated value is
$The width
calculated value is
HAYDBOOK
bl is a function of the milled depth t,. Its value has been calculated on the basis of the formula bl = b =r X (d - 0. This
both the nominal and maximum value of the width of the keyway in the hub.
bl is a function of the milled depth t2. Its value has been calculated on the basis of the formula b = 12 X (d - 12). This
both the nominal and minimum value of the width of the keyway in the shaft.
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
161
IS : 2291 - 1981
Note - When the drive is subject to particularly severe shocks or when changes in the direction of rotation are relatively frequent it is
recommended
to use a key of larger than specified section whose dimensions will be calculated from the following data:
t =o.i d
11 = 1
12 = f -I- 0.3 mm (for t 10 mm)
= I + 0.4 mm (for 10 mm r 45 mm)
=r + 0.5 mm (for t 45 mm)
b=rX(d--)=0,3d
b, = b = I X (d - r) = 0.3 d
bz = rz X (d - r2) s and R according ro rhe ruble beloi:
All dimensions
For r
Above
---
9
14
I8
26
42
56
63
9
14
18
26
42
56
up to
in millimetres.
Min
0.6
1.0
1.6
2.5
3.0
4.0
5.0
1
I
Max
Max
0.8
1.2
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
0.6
1.0
1.6
2.5
3.0
4.0
5.0
1
Min
0.4
0.7
1.2
2.0
2.5
3.0
4.0
- A pair of tangential key shall be designated by their common thickness, combined width and
common length followed by the number of this standard.
3. Designation
Example:
A pair of tangential keys with thickness t = 8 mm, width b = 24 mm and length I= 100 mm shall be
designated as Tangential Keys 8 X 24 X 100 IS : 2291.
4.1 The relative positions of keys after assembly shall be made secure by dowelling
or some other suitable means.
4.2 To facilitate the cutting of keyways on the shaft and in the hub, they may be located 180 apart, by agreement
betyeen the interested parties.
Steel of tensile strength not less than 600 MPa.
EXPLANATORY
NOTE
This standard was first published in 1963 and subsequently revised in 1976. On the basis of comments
received, the committee responsible for its preparation felt it necessary to revise the specification again to be in
line with IS0 3117-1977 Tangential keys and keyways.
In the present revision, sectional view of keyway has been modified and the values of calculated width of
keyway in hub and in shaft has been specified.
162
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART3
IS : 2292
- 1974
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
TAPERKEYSANDKEYWAYS
(First Revision )
Scope -
Dimensions
Types Type
T,ype
Type
The keys shall be of the fol!owing types:

A - Keys with both ends round
B - Keys with both ends square
C - Keys with one end round and the other end square.
and tolerances
for plain taper keys and keyways.
Dimensions
1
Kejs
SECTIONXX
TYPE
TYPE
All dimensions
Tole on b
2
3
4
5
0
- 0.025
25
3
4
0
- 0.030
0
- 0.025
0
- 0.030
22
0
- 0.052
14
14
0
-0.110
in millimetres.
Tol on h*
h9
TYPE
Min
Max
0.16
0.25
Min
Max
20
0.16
0.25
36
0.16
0.25
10
45
0.25
0.40
12
56
0.25
0.40
16
70
0.60
0.80
63
250
0.60
0.80
70
280
28
16
0.60
0.80
80
320
32
18
0.60
0.80
90
360
1.00
1.20
100
400
36
*Tolerance
-j.O62
on h: Square
20
Section h9; Rectangular
- it,30
.!
Range of key length, I
Section hl I.
(Continued.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
163
IS : 2292- 1974
b
Tqle on b
h9
40
/I
22
45
--- 0.062
25
Tol on h*
Range of key length, I
s
Min
Max
Min
MaTi
1.09
1.20
I IO
400
- 0.130
I .oo
1.20
125
400
140
400
1.00
_(
1.20
1.60
1.60
100
*Tolerance
0.087
on h: Square
h9: Rectangular
1.60
0.160
2.50
3.00
2.50
3.00
2.50
3.00
50
Section
Section
2.00
2.00
/
I
2.00
I
1
hl I.
3.2 Keyways
TAPER
x-7
Cl00
DETAIL OF
KEYWAY AND KEY
d
IT---I
)
SECTION
XX
All dimensions
ksmw
X-4
in millimf :tres.
Keyway
To1 on
t2
200
45X25
200
230
50 X 28
+ 0.080
230
260
56X32
260
290
63 X 32
1
1
56
20.0
63
20.0
290
330
70 X 36
70
330
380
80 X 40
80
380
440
90x
440
500
164
45
100 x 50
15.0
1 90
1 100
9.1
17.0
5.0
+ 0.220
+ 0.100
I
0.25
0.25
0.16
0.25
0.25
0.40
0.25
0.40
I 0.70
1.00
;==I
T-1
II.1
+ 0.3
0
22.0
13.1
1.20
1.60
25.0
14.1
2.00
2.50
2.00
2.50
18.1
2.00
2.50
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
28.0
+ 0.120
0.260
+ 0.3
0
0.16
0.16
31.0
16.1
1
HANDBOOK
3.3 Preferred
Length and Weight of Keys
All dimensions
Preferred
Length
I
in millimetres.
Key (b X It)
2X2
3X3
4X4
5X5
6X6
8X7
10X8
12X8
14X9
16X1018X112OX1222X1425X1428X1632X1836X204OX2245X255OX28
Weight for Keys, Type B, kg/ 1 000 pieces (approximate)*

6
0.186
S--
0.246
0.558
10
0.306
0.695
1.24
12
0.366
0.83
14
0.424
16
I .48
2.32
_.
_.
._
0.966
1.73
2.71
0.482
1.10
I .97
3.09
4.46
18
0.540
1.23
2.21
3.47
5.01
20
0.598
22
25
28
1.37
2.45
. 3.84
I .50
2.69
4.22
6.1
1.69
3.04
4.78
6.92
10.8
15.5
1.87
3.39
5.34
7.73
12.1
17.3
5.90
8.66
9.52
2.14
3.86
6.08
8.80
13.7
19.7
23.6
36
2.39
4.32
6.81
9.86
15.4
22.1
26.5
40
4.77
7.54
10.9
17.1
24.5
29.4
38.7
45
5.34
8.45
12.2
19.1
27.5
33.0
43.4
55.2
9.32
13.5
10.4
5.1
63
70
21.2
30.4
36.5
48.
61.2
75.9
23.6
33.9
40.7
53.6
68.4
84.8
103
-~
16.8
26.4
38.0
45.6
60.0
76.5
95.1
116
149
50
._
32
56
_~
18.6
29.2
42.0
50.4
66.5
84.8
105
128
165
187
80
33.2
47.1
51.3
15.6
96.5
120
146
188
214
274
90
37.0
53.3
64.0
84.6
108
134
163
211
239
308
397
--
100
58.8
70.4
93.5
119
148
181
233
265
341
439
551
110
64.3
77.2
102
131
163
198
256
290
374
482
605
741
125
86.9
115
147
183
223
289
328
423
546
685
839
I 080
~~
140
96.3
125
163
204
248
322
366
471
609
764
937
I 200
I 500
All dimensions
Preferred
Length
I
in millimetres.
Key (b X h)
2X2
3X3
4X4
5X5
6X6
8X7
10X8
12X8
14X9
16X1018X1120X1222X1425X1428X1632X1836X2040X2245X2550X23
Weight for Keys, Type B, kg/ 1 000 pieces (approximate)*

160
144
185
231
281
365
415
535
691
206
257
314
407
463
597
283
346
449
510
659
490
557
550
626
180
200
220
376
250
280
692
320
868
1 060
1 370
773
973
1 190
1 530
1 910
854
1 070
1 320
I 700
2 220
721
933
1 170
1 440
I 860
2 320
811
1 050
1 320
1630
2100
2 620
899
1 170
1 470
1810
2 330
2 926
1010
1 320
1 660
2 050
2 650
3 300
1 470
1 850
2 290
2 950
3 700
2040
2510
3250
4080
360
400
Weight deduction
~
0.013
0.043
0.104
0.203
0.35 1
0.724
1.29
1.84
for Type A
Note ~ For taper keys of width h = 56 to 100 mm, there are no specified lengths.
*For calculations of weights, density of steel taken as 7.85 g/cm).
2.81
4.06
5.66
7.62
10.7
13.8
19.8
29.2
40.6
55.8
80.6
1710
112
IS : 2292 - 1974
1. Designation
lesignated
A taper
key of Type A having
width
12 mm, height 8 mm and length
50 mm shall be
as:
Taper Key A 12 X & X50 IS : 2292
5. Tolerances
on Length of Key and Keyway
Length
Tolerance
of Key
Key Length
Up to 28
32 to 80
90 and above
On
Keyway Length
+ 0.2
+ 0.3
+ 0.5
0.2
0.3
0.5
not less than 600 MN/m2 (- 60 kgf/mml).
EXPLANATORY
NOTE
This standard was first published in 1963 and was based on DIN 6886-1956 which has since been revised.
While issuing this revision, the committee responsible for the preparation
of this standard has brought this
standard in line with ISO/ R 774-1969 Taper keys with or without Gib-head and their corresponding
keyways.
In addition, the weight of keys for specified lengths, derived from DIN 6886-1967, has been included in the
standard.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
167
IS :2293 - 1974
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATfON
FOi3
GIB-HEAD KEYS AND KEYWAYS
( First
I. Scope -
Dimensions
and tolerances
Revision-)
for Gib-head
keys and keyways.
!: Dimensions
!.l Keys
All dimensions
in millimetres.
80
90
100
00.087
*To1 on h: Square
168
70
80
45
2.50
3.00
50
2.50
3.00
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
h9; Rectangular
Section hl 1.
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 2293- 1974
2.2 Keyways
x---l
SECTION
XX
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
TAPER1:lOO
2.3 Pwferred
Length
and
Weight
of Keys
All dimensions
in millimetres
Key (b X h)
Preferred
Length
4X4
5X5
6X6
8X7
IO X 8
12 X 8
14 X 9
16 X lo
18 X II
20 X 12
22 X I4
25 X I4
28 X I6
32 X I8
36 X 20
40 X 22
45 X 25
50 X 28
*Weight for Keys, Type B, kg/ I 000 pieces (approximate)

I4
1 2.57
4.23
I6
2.82
4.62
7.15
I8
3.07
5.00
7.70
20
3.31
5.39
8.25
14.4
3.55
5.77
8.81
15.9
22
25
3.92
6.35
9.64
16.3
24.5
4.28
6.92
IO.5
17.7
26.4
32
4.75
7.67
Il.5
19.4
28.7
37.4
28
36
..~
5.25
8.42
12.6
21.1
31.2
40.0
40
5.70
9.16
13.7
22.8
33.8
43.3
45
6.27
IO.1
15.0
24.9
36.8
47.1
65.2
86.3
II.0
16.4
27. I
39.9
50.6
69.8
92.6
I21
12.0
18.0
29.5
43.4
54.8
75.4
100
130
166
63
19.7
32.5
47.7
60.6
82.3
109
I41
178
231
70
21.5
35.4
51.7
6p.7
88.7
II7
ISI
I91
249
294
39.4
57.6
71.7
98.2
129
166
209
271
320
426
43.4
63.4
78.6
107
I41
I81
227
294
347
460
621
50
56
80
901~
60.3
_~
100
68.2
86.0
I I6
I51
I95
245
317
372
493
665
874
I IO
74.8
93.3
I25
!64
210
262
339
398
527
707
929
I 190
102
138
181
230
278
373
436
574
772
1 010
I 290
112
I51
l9R
251
303
407
475
626
828
I 090
I 390
I 840
2 370
I65
220
279
335
451
534
690
920
I 200
I 520
2 010
2 580
241
306
366
493
572
753
I 000
I 300
I 650
2 170
2 780
397
536
620
818
I 080
I 410
I 780
2 340
3 000
577
668
881
I 170
I 510
I910
2 480
3 210
639
739
971
I 290
I 660
2 100
2 750
3 520
808
I 060
I 400
I 810
2 280
2 980
3 800
I 170
I 550
2 000
2 490
3 270
4 170
I 700
2 200
2 750
3 610
4 490
2 390
3 000
3 920
4 990
I25
14n
160
180
200
nn
250
280
320
,-
wn
400
Nnt~
332
_
428
-.
-
The leneths of kevs of width h = 56 to 100 mm shall be as agreed to between the purchaser
and the supplier.
IS : 2293 - 1974
3. Designation
A Gib-head
key of width 12 mm, height 8 mm and length 50 mm shall be designated

Gib-Head
4. Tolerance
Key 12 X 8 X 50 IS : 2293
on Length of Keys
Tolerance
mm
Length of Key
mm
5.
as:
Material of Key -
up to 28
0.2
32 to 80
0.3
90 and above
0.5
not less than 600 MN/mm2
(- 60 kgf/mm2).
.!
EXPLANATORY
NOTE
This standard was first published in 1963 and was based on DIN 6887-1956 which has since been revised.
While issuing this revision, the committee responsible for the preparation
of this standard has brought this
standard essenfially in line with ISO/ R 774-1969 Taper keys with or without Gib-head and theircorresponding
keyways. In addition, the weights of keys for specified lengths, derived from DIN 6887-1968, have been included
in the standard.
FASTENERS-PART
171
IS :2294 - 1980
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
WOODRUFF
KEYS AND KEYWAYS
( First Revision.)
~__
. Scope -
Specifies the dimensions
and general
reqmrements
of woodruff
.l It also gives the relationship to be observed between the diameter

0th torque transmission
and positional applications.
. Dimensions
.l Keys -
keys and keyways.
of the shaft and the section of the key for
and Tolerances
See Table
I.
I
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
AND TOLERANCES
All dimensions
OF KEYS
in millimetres.
EDGES
SHARP
REMOVED
-_cr-
I
b
Tol on b
.
Tol on h,
hll
hl
h9*
sxL5O
-b-cl
To1 on D
h12
s
Min
1.4
I.0
4.0
-
2.6
1.5
2.0
0
0.025
2.0
2.5
7.0
0
0.060
7.0
2.6
10.0
3.7
3.7
0
- 0.075
3.0
0
0.120
0
o.,lso
10.0
Max
0.16
0.25
0.16
0.25
0.16
0.25
0.16
0.25
0.16
0.25
i
3.0
:.
5.0
4.0
_;,030
o<
_:,090
13.0
- 0.110
:~
5.0
6.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
0.036
*A closer tolerance
172
0.40
8
-
may be adopted
32.0
subject to agreement
- 00.250
0.40
0.60
0.60
between the supplier and the purchaser.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-FART
IS :2294 - 1980
2.2
Keyways
--
See
Table 2.
TABLE 2
DIMENSIONS
AND TOLERANCES
All dimensions
OF KEYWAYS
in millimetres.
SECTION
AA
DETAIL
Width
Key
b
bXh,XD
tm--v
Normal
Nom
Depth
Tolerance
Shaft
N9
on h
-rol on
Fit
Close Fit
Hub
Js9
Shaft and Hub

P9
fl
II
To1 on
12
11
Max
Min
1.; x
1.4 x
4.0
1.0
1.0
0.6
0.16
0.08
1.5 X
2.6 X
7.0
1.5
2.0
0.8
,O.16
0.08
2.0 X
2.6 X
7.0
2.0
1.8
1.0
0.16
0.08
2.0 x
3.7 x 10.0
2.0
2.9
1.0
0.16
0.08
2.5 x
3.7 x 10.0
2.5
2.7
1.2
0.16
0.08
3.0 x
5.0 x 13.0
3.0
3.8
1.4
0.16
o.ori
3.0 X
6.5 X 16.0
3.0
5.3
1.4
0.16
0.08
4.0 X
6.5 X 16.0
4.0
5.0
1.8
0.25
0.16
4.0 x
7.5 x 19.0
4.0
6.0
1.8
0.25
0.16
5.0 X
6.5 X 16.0
5.0
4.5
2.3
0.25
0.16
5.0 x
7.5 x 19.0
5.0
5.5
2.3
0.25
d.16
7.0
2.3
0.25
0.16
6.0
6.5
2.8
0.25
0.16
6.0
7.5
2.8
0.25
0.16
0.40
0.25
0.40
0.25
0.004
0.029
t.030
+ 0.012
- 0.012
+ El:
_ 5.0 x
6.0 X
9.0 x 22.0
9.0 X 22.0
6.0 X 10.0 X 25.0

8.0 X 11.0 X 28.0
Note -
The diameter
8.0
i.036
- 0.015
2 0.051
%:~
of the keyways
in the shaft shall be equal to nominal

-
ON INDUSTRIAL
8.0
+ 0.2
0
+0.3
0
FASTENERS-PART
3.3
3.3
10.0
10.0
6.
HANDBOOK
0.012
0.042
5.0
10.0 X 13.0 X 32.0
0.006
0.031
+ 0.1
0
diameter
+ 0.1
0
.
+ 0.2
0
D of the key with a tolerance
of + 0.5 mm
--
IS :2294 - 1980
3. Material -
not less than 590 MPa in the finished
condition.
4. Relationship of Shaft Diameter to Key Size -Two

series of relationships between shaft diameter and key size
are given in Table 3 - Series 1 for torque applications and Series 2 for positional applications
(for example,
where, as in the case of an interference fit, the torque is not transmitted
through the key but through the
shaft/ hub interface).
TABLE 3
RELATIONSHIP
OF SHAFT DIAMETER
TO KEY SIZE
5. Designation
Shall be designated
by its width and its height followed by the number
of this standard,
Example:
A woodruff
key of width 4 mm and height 6.5 mm shall be designated

Woodruff
Key 4 X 6.5 -
EXPLANATORY
as:
IS : 2294
NOTE
This standard was first published in 1963. In view of the developments at the international
level the
committee responsible for the preparation of this standard decided to revise it to bring it in line with IS0 : 39121977 Woodruff keys and keyways. Whitney keys and keyways have not been included in this revision and this
form shall be adopted by agreement between the supplier and the purchaser. Relationship of the shaft diameter
to key size have been included in this revision.
IS : 2638 - 1974
Indian
Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
FLAT SPLIT COTTERS
( First Revision )
1. Scope -
for flat split totters.
1. Grade - Precision Grade (P) and Black Grade (B) as specified in IS : 1367 - 1967 Technical supply conditions
or threaded fasteners (jirsr revision).
3. Dimensions
5.1 As given in Table
5.2 Thickness -
1 and Table 2.
As given in Table 2.
3.3 Legs - The legs shall be unequal

3.4 Split Length -
in length, the length of the longer leg and the difference in length of the legs
The length of split shall be equal to half the length of the flat split cotter.
3.5 Preferred
length width combinations
1. Tolerances
1.
As given in Fig. 1.
&
I+-$
1 B PRECISION GRADE
1A BLACK GRADE
FIG.
5. Mechanical
TOLERANCES
ON FLAT
SPLIT
COTTERS
Properties
5.1 Precision Grade 5.2 Black Grade -
Property
Property
class 6.6 of IS : 1367 - 1967.
class 4.6 of IS : 1367-1967.
6.1 Finish - Flat split totters shall be cleanly finished, flat and true with clean cut edges and free from burrs and
other defects.
6.2 Preservation - Unless otherwise specified, flat split totters shall be supplied in a well cleaned condition
xtitably protected against rust.
6.3 In regard to requirements not covered in this standard, it shall conform to the requirements
materials (&St revision).
7. Sampling -The sampling and criteria of acceptance
sampling non-threaded
fasteners.
8. Designation
Shall be designated
and
of IS : 1387-1967
with IS : 682 l-l 973 Methods for
by the name, thickness, width, length, number of this standard,
and grade.
Example:
A flat split cotter of thickness
designated as:
4 mm, width
12 mm, length 50 mm and of black grade shall be
Flat split cotter 4 X 12 X 50 IS : 2638-B
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
175
IS : 2638 - 1974
9. Test
9.1 Bend Test - Each sample selected as specified in 7 shall, when cold, permit
the length of the split and the wings thus opened shall be capable of being bent
sign of failure through an angle of 180 until the ends of split portion touch
internal radii of the bends are not more than half the thickness of the material.
arris formed on one leg by the punching operations shall not be considered
TABLE
being opened up for two-thirds of

backwards without showing any
the body of the cotter, and the
Cracks appearing in the burr or
as a defect.
DIMENSIbNS
FOR FLAT SPLIT COTTERS
( Clauses 3.1, 3.3 and 3.5 )
t
T 11
WIDTH
D BASIC
BLACK
D h15
PRECISION
Dh13
MAX
6.00
MIN
7.42
MAX
MIN
3
1
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
25
28
l0.W
12.00
14.00
16.00
16.00
20.00
22.00
25.00
26.00
32
36
32.00
36.00
40
50
LO.00 50.0(
11.30 13.30 15.30 17.30 19.16 21.16 24.16 27.16 31.00 35.00 39.00,49.0(
9.42
8.00
10.00 12.00 14.00 16.00 19.W 20.00 22.00 25.00 26.W 32.00 36.00 40.00 S&0(
7.76
9.79 11.73 13.73 15.73 17.73 19.67 21.67 24.67 27.67
31.61 35.61 39.61 49.61
Ii COMBINATIONS
1 46.2
1 43.6
1 45.5
71.5 1 66.5 1 70.6 1 69.41

76.5 I 73.5 I 75.6 I 74.41
70
75 1
I132
I 126
I 131
1 129 I
172
168
171
169
170
162
192
176
166
181
191
179
169
160
190
*For dimensions
176
1 44.51
I
I
130 I
of T, see Table 2.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :2638
- 1974
10. Packing - Unless otherwise specified, the number of totters packed in each carton shall be 100,250,500 and
1 000 or in bags of 50 kg. Each carton/bag
shall have flat split cotter of one size and of one grade only.
11. Marking
11.1 The cartons or bags shall be suitably marked to indicate size, grade quantity
trade-mark.
and manufacturers
11.2 ZSZ Certification Marking -
Institution.
Details available
TABLE 2
with the Indian
THICKNESS OF FLAT SPLIT COTTERS

All dimensions
Basic Size
T
3.2
in millimetres.
Precision h13
Black h15
Min
Max
3.20
3.02
EXPLANATORY
mechanical
Standards
name and
Max
Min
3.20
2.72
NOTE
This standard was originally published in 1964. Subsequent to the revision of IS : 1367, the symbols for
properties4D and 5S are being substituted by 4.6 and 6.6.
In the preparation
of this standard, assistance has been derived from IRSS H7-51 Flat split totters,
issued by the Ministry of Railways, Government
of India.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
177
IS : 6166- 1971
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
THIN TAPER KEYS AND KEYWAYS
.. Scope-
Dimensions
and tolerances
for thin taper keys and keyways.
!. Dimensions
!.l Keys
TYPE
TYPE
All dimensions
in millimetres.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 6166- 1971
2.2 Keyways
rlAPER WOO
I-
DETAIL A
All dimensions
1 Range of Shaft
-Dia
d
Above
HANDBOOK
Key
in millimetres.
Keyway
bXh
To1 on
II
I2
30
8X
30
38
10X
38
44
12X
+ 0.098
12
1.7
13
+ 0.1
0
To1 on
up to
22
2.2
2.2
+ 0.1
0
Min
t Max
0.16
0.25
0.25
0.40
0.25
0.40
0.25
0.40
44
50
14X
2.2
50
58
16X
2.4
0.25
0.40
58
65
18X
2.4
0.25
0.40
0.40
0.60
0.40
_(
1 0.40
0.60
65
75
20X
2.4
15
85
22x
2.9
85
95
25X
2.9
95
110
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
1 + o.2
! 0.60
179
IS : 6166 - 1971
2.3 Preferred
Length
of Key
Key
Section
10
12
14
16
18
14
16
18
36
40
45
50
_
_
_
_
_
_
-
_
_
_
_
_
_
-
_
_
_
_
_
_
-
_
_
_
_
_
_
~
_
_
_
_
_
_
-.
-
160
180
200
220
250
280
320
360
400
10
11
12
20
22
25
28
32
_
_
_
_
~-
_
_
_
_
_
.-
20
22
25
28
32
36
40
45
20
22
25
28
32
36
40
45
25
28
32
36
40
45
32
36
40
45
-36
40
45
45
_
-
_
_
_
-
_
_
_.
--
50
56
63
; 70
: ,80
j 90
50
56
63
70
-
50
56
63
70
80
90
50
56
63
70
80
90
50
56
63
70
80
90
50
56
63
70
80
90
50
56
63
70
80
90
56
63
70
80
90
63
70
80
90
~
70
80
90
-80
90
90
too
110
125
-
100
110
125
140
-
100
110
125
,140
160
180
_
100
110
125
140
160
180
200
_
100
110
125
140
160
180
200
220
~~
--
100
110
125
140
160
180
200.
220
250
~
-
100
110
125
140
160
180
200
220
250
280
-~
100
I10
125
140
160
I80
200
220
250
280
320
-
100
110
125
140
160
180
200
220
250
280
320
360
-
$ 100
j 110
125
140
160
180
200
220
250
280
320
360
400
3. Designation
designated
-- A thin taper key of Type A having width 10 mm,height
100
110
125
140
160
I80
200
220
250
280
320
360
400
125
140
160
180
200
220
250
280
320
360
400
140
160
180
200
220
250
280
320
360
400
6 mm and length 25 mm shall.be
as:
Key A 10 X 6 X 25 IS : 6166
4. Tolerances
Length
of Key
lJpmtZ28
32 to 80
90 and above
180
Tolerance
Tolerance
on Key
:2
- 0.3
- 0.5
Carbon
steel of tensile strength
on Keyway
+m:2
+ 0.3
+ 0.5
not less than 600 MN/ m2 (60 kgf/ mm2 approximately).
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 6167 - 1971
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
THIN PARALLEL
KEYS AND KEYWAYS
1. Scope -
Dimensions
and tolerances
for thin parallel
keys and keyways.
2. Dimensions
2.1
Keys
TYPE
TYPE
All dlmenslons
Tol on b
25
0.052
28
32
36
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
0
0.062
Range of Key Length

I
s
I
Min
Max
Min
Max
0.25
0.40
10
56
0.25
0.40
14
70
0.40
0.60
36
160
0.60
0.80
70
280
10
0.60
0.80
80
320
0.60
0.80
90
360
1.00
1.20
100
400
hll
3
0.030
in millimetres.
h9
0
TYPE
Tol on /I
.-0.060
II
12
FASTENERS-PART
0
0.110
181
IS : 6167- 1971
2.2 Keyways
cf+t2
t1
i
~XX
SECTION

,
Range
of
Keyway
Key
Shaft Dia
d
b X h
Above Up to
12
17
5x3
17
22
6X4
22
30
30
38
10 X
8X5
6
10
38
44
12X 6
12
44
50
14 X 6
14
To1 on b
-Runnin
Cm
Shaft
11
Light I
-__
Shaft
DlO
+ 0.030
0
+0.078
+0.030
0
0.030
+ 0.036
0
+ 0.098
+ 0.040
0
0.036
I + 0.043
+0.120
,+ 0.050
0
-0.043
N9
H9
To1 /- 12 1 To1
on
I on
+ 0.018
- 0.018
0.015
0.051
-++ 0.0215
-0.0215
-0.018
-0.061
35
4
4
5
75 j
85
22 X 9
22
I +0.052
+ 0.149
+ 0.065
0
0.052
+ 0.026
- 0.026
0.022 -z-+0
0.074
5.5
6
,w/.;062
182
+0.180
+0.080
0
0.062
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 6167 - 1971
2.3 Preferred
Length of Key
All dimensions in millimerres.
Key
Section
10
11
12
10
12
14
16
18
20
22.
25
20
32
36
1;
14
16
18
I;
1:
1
14
16
18
1
-
II
_
7
_
z
_
z
_
z
_
z
_
r
_
z
_
1
_
1
_
1
-
~~IIZE~17I~Z
::
25
:2
;:
::
32
s.
:;
:2
::
72
25
::
y*
II
11
:z
36
:z
::
36
::
36
40
45
:;
1:
::
::
45
75
11
::
63
::
63
z
90
18
:z
z:
::
::
:i
4:
7o
s
3
80
3 100
90
: 110
::
125
140
160
180
;!i
,250
2l30
320
1:
-
::
::
::
;;
::
90
80
1;:
;8
1:
125
140
-
110
,125
140
160
,-
16
63
1
63
80
90
z
100
90
;:
1::
;!I
100
1:
125
140
160
180
tt
125
140
160
180
110
125
140
160
180
110
125
140
160
180
200
-
200
220
-
220
200
250
-
..
360
70
90
110
125
140
160
180
100
110
125
140
160
180
100
110
125
140
160
180
100
110
125
140
160
180
220
200
250
280
-
220
200
250
280
320
220
200
250
280
320
220
200
250
280
320
.-
400
3. Designation
designated as:
360
360
400
A thin parallel key of Type A having width 10 mm, height 6 mm and length 25 mm shall be
Key A 10 X 6 X 25 IS : 6167
4. Tolerances
Length of Key
Tolerance on Key
Tolerance on Key way
up::28
32 to 80
90 and above
-_:2
- 0.3
- 0.5
+mz2
+ 0.3
+ 0.5
HANDBOOK
Carbon
ON INDUSTRIAL
steel of tensile strength
FASTENEHS-PART
not less than 600 MN/m*
(60 kgf/mm2).
183
SECTION E
Miscellaneous
IS : 2995 - 1965
Indian Standard
DIMENSIONS
FOR
SET COLLARS
__-1.Forbword
1.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 27 January 1965, after the draft
inalized by the Machine Tools Sectional Committee had been approved by the Mechanical Engineering
Xvision Council.
1.2 This standard has been prepared with a view to unifying the dimensions of set collars used in general
ngineering for locking or locating bearings and other running parts in the axial direction, as well as to obtain
nterchangeability
of the collars with shafts. Set collars specified in this standard are suitable for shafts in the
liameter range of 2 mm to 200 mm. The diameter steps have been selected from the R20 series of preferred
lumbers. A heavy series of set collars has been provided in this standard, for use in cases where greater axial
oads have to be sustained, than is usual with bearings and similar applications.
1.3 While preparing
this standard,
assistance
has been derived from:
CSN 02 2910-1954 Stavtci Krouzky se stavecimi Srouby (Set rmgs for shafts). Ui&prO
normalizaci a
mzieni.
DIN 703-1955 Blanke Stellringe (Bright set collars - heavy pattern series). Deutscher Normenausschuss.
DIN 705-1955 Blanke Stellringe (Bright set collars - light pattern series). Deutscher Normenausschuss.
VSM 15210-1945 Bagues darret (Set rings - light series). Vereins Schweizerischer Maschinenindustrieller.
VSM
15212-1945
Bagues
darret
(Set, rings
heavy
series).
Vereins
Schweizerischer
Maschinenindustrieller.
VSM 13214-1945 Bagues darret (Set rings - heavy series - fixed by taper pin). Vereins Schweizerischer
Maschinenindustrieller.
ralue, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS : 2-1960
/alue should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
1. Scope
1.1 This standard
100 mm diameter
specifies the material and dimensions for set collars in the light series for shafts from 2 mm to
and in the heavy series for shafts from 10 mm to 150 mm diameter.
2. Material
2.1 The set collars shall be made from a suitable
wrought steel for general engineering purposes.
steel, such as St 37 according
to IS : 1570-1961 Schedules for
3. Dimensions
3.1 The dimensions
respectively.
of set collars
of the light and heavy series shall be as specified in Table
1 and Table 2
3.2 The grub screws shall be according to IS : 2388- 1963 Specification for slotted grub screws. They shall be of
the slotted head. Type C, for light series and socketed head, Type C, for the heavy series.
3.3 The taper pins shall be according
for cylindrical
pins.
4. Designation
4.1 The set collars shall be designated
by the series, the type, the nominal
bore and the number
of this standard.
Example:
A light series set collar of Type A with a nominal
bore d, = 20 mm shall be designated
as:
Light Set Collar A20 IS : 2995
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
187
fS : 2995- 1965
TABLE 1
DIMENSIONS
FOR LIGHT SERIES

( Clause 3.1 )
All dimensions
SET COLLARS
in millimetres.
dl= 2 TO 70rhm
dj=72
TO 200mm
TYPE A
---id, I--
---I
L-t
sx45
dl=
4 TO 150mm
TYPE
NOMINAL
4
H8
2
2.5
(3)
(3.5)
4
4.5
(5?5,
(6)
(7)
8
(9)
10
II
(12)
14
(15)
16
18
20
(22)
(24)
25
(26)
28
(30)
(32)
BORE
b
j14
3.5
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
8
8
8
10
10
10
12
12
12
12
14
14
14
16
16
16
16
16
16
dz
d,
hl3
,6
7
7
8
8
10
IO
12
12
12
16
18
20
20
22
25
25
28
32
32
36
40
40
40
45
45
50
M2
M2
M2
M2.5
M2.5
M3
M3
M4
M4
M4
M4
MS
M5
M5
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M8
M8
ME
M8
MS
M8
HI1
-
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
8
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
GRUB
TAPER
SCREW*
PlNSt
M2
X3
M2
X 3
M2
X3
M 2.5X
4
M2.5X
4
M3
X4
M3
X4
M4
X5
M4
X5
M4
X 5
M4
X6
MS
X 8
MS
X8
M5
X8
M6
X8
M6
X8
M6
X8
M6
X8
M6
X8
M6
X8
M6
x10
M6
x10
M6
x10
M8
X10
M8
x12
M8
X12
M8
x12
1.6 X
1.6X
1.6 X
1.6 X
1.6 X
2x
3x
3X
3X
4x
4x
4x
4x
5x
5x
5x
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
8X
12
12
14
14
14
20
25
25
25
30
30
30
35
35
35
40
45
45
45
50
50
55
Conrrnued
188
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 2995- 1965
TABLE1
OlMENslONsFOR
DOLLARS
I,IGHTSER~ESSET
NOMINAL BORE
4
H8
(34)
(35)
(36)
(38)
,g
(Z)
50
(52)
(55)
56
(58)
(60)
63
(65)
(68)
(70)
(72)
(75)
80
(85)
90
(95)
100
110
(120)
125
(130)
140
(150)
160
(170)
180
(190)
200
Note - Non-preferred
*See 1S
tSee IS
conrd
GRUB
b
j14
16
16
16
16
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
20
20
20
20
20
20
22
22
22
22
22
25
25
25
25
28
28
28
28
32
32
32
32
32
size are indicated
d,
d,
h13
50
56
56
56
63
63
70
HI1
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
IO
12
12
12
12
12
12
16
18
16
16
-
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
.7O
80
80
80
80
90
90
90
100
100
100
110
110
110
125
125
140
140
160
160
180
180
200
200
220
250
250
280
280
M8
M8
M8
M8
Ml0
MI0
Ml0
Ml0
MI0
MI0
MI0
MI0
Ml0
Ml0
MI0
MI0
MI0
Ml0
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
M20X2
M20X2
M20X2
M20X2
M20X2
SCREW*
M8
M8
M8
M8
Ml0
Ml0
MI0
Ml0
Ml0
MI0
MI0
Ml0
Ml0
MI0
MI0
MI0
Ml0
Ml0
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
M16,
M20
M20
M20
M20
x12
x12
x12
x12
X 16
X 16
X 16
X 16
,X 16
X 16
X 16
X 16
X 20
X 20
X 20
X 20
X 20
X 20
X 20
X 20
X 20
X 20
X20
X 25
X 25
X 25
X 25
x 30
x 30
x 30
X 30
x35
X 40
X 40
X 45
X 45
TAPER
PlNSt
8X
85
8X
8X
,8X
8X
8X
8X
10x
10x
10x
IO x
10x
10 x
10 x
10 x
10 x
10x
10 x
10 x
10 x
12 x
12 x
12 x
12 x
12 X
12 X
16 X
16 X
16 X
16 X
-
55
60
60
60
70
70
80
.80
90
90
90
90
100
100
100
110
110
110
120
120
120
140
140
150
150
180
180
200
200
220
220
within brackets,
: 2388-1963.
: 2393-1963.
189
IS :2995 - 1965
( &use
All dimensions
d,=10
3.1 )
in millimetres.
TO 65mm
dl=68
NOMINAI RORE
4
H8
IO
11
12
(13)
14
(15)
16
(17)
(!)
20
22
(24)
25
(26)
(Z)
32
(34)
(35)
36
(38)
40
(42)
45
(48)
50
(52)
(55)
56
(58)
(60)
63
(65)
(68)
(2)
(75)
(:z)
(i!)
100
110
(120)
125
(130)
140
(150)
Note -. Non-preferred
*See IS
size are indicated
b
j14
12
12
14
14
16
16
16
18
18
18
20
20
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
36
36
38
38
TO 150mm
GRUB SCREW
dz
h13
25
25
30
30
35
35
40
40
45
45
50
50
56
56
56
63
63
63
70
70
70
70
80
80
80
80
90
90
90
90
100
100
100
100
110
110
110
110
Ii5
125
125
140
140
160
160
180
180
200
200
Q
M6
M6
M8
M8
M8
M8
M8
M8
M8
MS
Ml0
Ml0
MI0
Ml0
Ml0
Ml0
Ml0
Ml0
MI0
Ml0
Ml0
Ml0
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
M20X2
M20X2
1.6.
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
I:6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.5
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4
4
4
4
ms xx
M6 X8
M8 x12
M8 x12
M8 x 12
MS x12
M8 x12
M8 x 12
M8 x 12
M8 x 12
Ml0 X 16
Ml0 X 16
MI0 X 16
MlOX 16
Ml0 X 16
Ml0 X 16
Ml0 X 16
Ml0 X 16
Ml0 X 16
Ml0 X 16
Ml0 X 16
Ml0 X 16
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml6 x 20
Ml6 x 20
Ml6 x 20
Ml6X20
Ml6 x 20
Ml6 x 20
Ml6 x 20
Ml6 X 25
Ml6 X 25
Ml6 X 25
Ml6 X 25
Ml6 x 30
Ml6 X 30
M20 X 30
M20 x 30
within brackets,
: ;388-197 _
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 3075(Part 1) - 1986
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR CIRCLIPS
Part 1 : For Shafts

( First Revision )
I. Scope
1.1 Covers the requirement
iO0 mm in heavy type.
of circlips for shafts of nominal
1.2 Additional information

like load-bearing
lave been given in Appendix A.
1. Symbols -
For the purpose
capacity, detachment
of this standard,
the following
a -
radial width of the lug
b -
beam (radial width of circlip opposite
c -
distance
do -
between
measuring
diameter range 3 to 300 mm in normal type and 15 to

speed, shape of groove and fitting of circlip
letter symbols
shall apply
the aperture)
plates for testing spiral flatness
shaft diameter
d2 -
groove diameter
& -
internal
diameter
of circlip not under tension
d4 -
maximum
ds -
diameter
of the lug holes
E -
modulus
of elasticity
symmetrical
diameter
of bore during
fitting
FN -
load-bearing
capacity
of groove at a yield point of the grooved material
FR -
load-bearing
capacity
of circlip with sharp-edged
FRg -
load-bearing
capacity
or circlip for abutment
ReL -
yield point
g -
edge chamfering
h -
distance
m n -
N~s -
distance
of the abutment
abutment
of 200N/mm*
of the pressing
with edge chamfering
distance
(see A-l.1
part (see A-12)

g (see A-l%
surface to the circlip
between the plates when testing conical deformation
groove width
edge margin
detachment
speed of the circlip (see A-2)
r -
curvature
in the groove base or test jaws
s -
thickness
of the circlip
t -
groove depth with nominal
3. Dimensions,
sizes of dl and d2
Tolerances and Design Data
3.1 Dimensions,
tolerances
and design data for circlips, normal type, shall be as given in Tablel, reaa wtth Fig.1
3.2 Dimensions,
tolerances
and design data for circlips, heavy type, shall be as given in Table 2, read with Fig. 1
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
ml
IS : 3075 (Part 1) - 1986
EXTERNAL
CLEARANCE
UNLOADED
*dl B 170mm
DETAILS
AT x
ASSEMBLED
Note 1 - Location of the lug hole shall be such that it leaves uniform material all round.
Note 2 - Unloaded shape of ring at manufacturers discretion.
*At manufacturers discretion.
FIG. 1
192
DIMENSIONS
FOR CIRCLIPS
FOR SHAFTS
TABLE 1
DIMENSIONS
AND DESIGN DATA FOR CIRCLIPS

(CIguse3,l;ahdFig.
I)
All dimensions
Shaft
Dim d,
Nom
Size
Circlip
Size
s
F Tolerance
da
Size
Tolerance
dzt
ds
3.7
0.6
4.7
Z:P:
TYPE
mS
Tolerance
Min
1.9
0.8
2.8
-: 04
i (hi0)
0.5
2.2
0.9
3.8
-:.048
0.5
0. I
0.3
8.6
2.5
1.1
4.8
0.7
0. I
0.3
10.3
0.8
0.15
0.5
0.9
0.15
-00.06
0.9
@IO)
1.1
$$l
Nh
FR ]n
FN
&
(h 1.0)
Design Data #
n
Max
. f 0.02.
0.4
NORMAL
Groove
b*
Size
2.7
in millimetres.
Min
HI3
WV
Min-
0.47
1 0.5
1 0.27
1 360 000
0.20
0.50
0.5
0.30
211 000
0.26
1.00
0.5
0.80
154 000
11.7
0.46
1.45
0.5
0.90
114 000
0.5
13.5
0.54
2.60
0.5
1.40
121 000
0.2
0.6
14.7
0.81
3.00
0.5
2.00
96 000
0.2
0.6
16
0.92
3.50
0.5
2.40
85 000
1.1
0.2
0.6
17
1.01
4.00
2.40
84 000
1.1
0.25
0.8
18
1.40
4.50
2.40
70 000
1.1
0.25
0.8
19
1.53
5.00
2.40
75 000
1.1
0.3
0.9
20.2
2.00
5.80
2.40
66 000
1.1
0.3
0.9
21.4
2.15
6.35
2.40
58 000
1.1
0.35
1.1
22.6
2.66
6.90
2.40
50 000
1.1
0.4
1.2
23.6
3.26
7.40
2.40
45 000
1.1
0.4
1.2
25
3.46
8.00
2.40
41 000
I
0.4
FOR SHAFTS
1 0.1 1
1.3
1.5
0.5
I
I
0.3
I
7
26.2
I
0.15
0.5
1.5
27.2
17.0
4.58
I
1.3
4.84.
1.5
I
17.0
3.75
Nom
Gze 0
liers /
10
39 000
I
1.5
3.80
35 000
1.3
0.5
1.5
28.4
5.06
17.1
1.5
3.85
32 000
1.3
0.5
1.5
29.6
5.36
16.8
1.5
3.75
29 000
1.3
0.5
1.5
30.8
5.65
16.9
1.5
3.80
27 000
19
1(Co hued
-
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
AND DESIGN DATA
FOR CIRCLIPS
All dimensions
FOR SHAFTS
NORMAL
TYPE-Contd
..
w
in millimetres.
%
Shaft .
Dia dl
Nom
Circlip
Is.
Size
1 Tole- 1
ds
Size
Design Data $
Groove
a
b*
Max
=I
d5
1 Tole-
At
Size
rance
Min
mt
I Tolerance
WI
W)
I
I
1
FN
FR
I
Min
H13
i FRB 1 Ndr
1~1
Min.
NV
4.4
22.9
1.3
0.55
1.7
33.2
6.75
16. I
1.5
3.65
27 000
4.4
23.9
1.3
0.55
1.7
34.2
7.05
16.2
1.5
3.70
25 000
4.5
4.7
3.1
24.9
3.2
26.6
26.9
4.8
3.4
27.6
27.9
3.5
28.6
29.6
5.2
3.6
2.5
30.3
23.2
24.2
25.9
+0.41
l-O.42
_
32.2
5.4
i Nom
I Size 0
Pliers 1
19
-:_:
5.6
jfconrinued)
5
Y
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
AND DESIGN
DATA
FOR CIRCLIPS
All dimensions
FOR SHAFTS
in millimetres.
NORMAL
TYPE-Conrd
TABLE
DIMkNSIONS
AND DESIGN
DATA
FOR CIRCLIPS
FOR SHAFTS
NORMAL
t;
TYPE-Conrd
( Cluuse 3.1; and Fig. I )

i All dimensions in millimetres.
*Dimension
t.Yee A-3.1.
$See A-3.2.
b shall not exceed dimension
a MU.
The design data apply only to circlips of spring steel as per 1s : 2507-1975 Specification
IIPliers conforming to IS: 7990-1976 Specification for pliers for external &clips.
for cold rolled steel strips f&r spring Cfirsr revision),
dq is calculated
from dd = dl + 2.1 a.
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
Circlio
t
Tole-
d,
Size
rance
b*
Max
Min
4.8
2.4
14.3
2.5.
---~a
tT---k-!
2
2
15.2
16.2
17
2
2
19
21
Size
Tole-
13.8
14.7
15.7
+0.10
^ ^,
16.5
f 0.05
18.5
20.5
-l-O.13
5.5
-0.42 ._
6
I22.2
H
23.2
25.9
5.1
+0.21
-0.42
! 2.7
HEAVY
TYPE
Tolerance
-00.1,
(hII)
3
3.1
FOR SHAFTS
Groo
dzt
i d5
rance

( Clause 3.2 and Fig. I )
All dimensions in millimttres.
-00.13
(hll)
1.85
0.5
1.5
31.6
5.06
36.3
1.5
8.20
36 000
1.85
0.5
1.5
34.6
5.65
36.0
1.5
8.10
29 000
1.85
0.55
1.7
37.3
6.75
34.2
1.5
7.60
29 200
2.15
0.55
1.7
38.5
7.05
45.0
1.5
10.3
25 000
27.9
29.6
(Continued)
TABLE 2
DIMENSIONS
AND DESIGN
DATA
FOR CIRCLIPS
All dimensions
FOR SHAFTS
HEAVY TYPE -Conrd
in millimetres.
Design Data 4
da
Min
4.5
69.3
FN
FR
(kN)
(kN)
39.7
165
2.5
FRg
Ndr
(kN)
Mine
26.0
Nom
Size 01
Pliers 1,
9 850
I
40
*Dimension b shall not exceed dimension (I Max.

tSee A-3.1.
$See A-3.2.
J The design data apply to circlips of spring steel as per IS: 2507-1975,
/(Pliers conforming to IS: 799&1976.
bq is calculated
from d, = dl + 2. I a.
5.3
106
16.2
383
59.4
5 710
5.3
111.5
80.8
386
61.0
4 980
5.3
122.1
90.0
368
3.5
51.6
4 180
85
IS : 3075 (Part 1) - 1986

4. Material and Hardness
4.1 The circlips shah be manufactured
from spring steel such as 70 C6 or 75 C6 as per IS: 2507-1975
Specification for cold rolled steel strips for springs Cfirst revision).
of circlips shall be as given below :
4.2 Hardness
Nominal Diameter
of Circlips
Over
Hardness
Upto
48
470 to 580 Vickers

hardness
(Corresponding to 47 to 54 Rockwell C hardness)
48
200
435 to 530 Vickers hardness (Corresponding

to 44 to 51 Rockwell C hardness)
200
300
390 to 470 Vickers hardness (Corresponding

to 40 to 47 Rockwell C hardness)
Note - Hardness values converted

metallic materials yirsr revision).
5.
as per IS: 4258-1982 Hardness
conversion
tables for
Designation
5.1 A circlip for shaft diameter

designated as:
(nominal
size)di = 40 mm and thickness
Circlip 40 X 1.75 N IS: 3075 (Part

5.2 A circlip for shaft diameter
designated as:
(nominal
type (N), shall be
1)
size) dl = 40 mm and thickness
Circlip 40 X 2.5 H IS: 3075 (Part
1.75 mm, normal
2.5 mm, heavy type (H), shall be
1)
6. Finish
6.1 Ali sharp edges shall be removed from the circlips. The circlips shall be free from burrs, cracks, laminations
and other defects.
6.1.1 The maximum permissible deviation on the profile at engaging
between the manufacturer
and the user in case of special application.
lip may also be mutually
agreed upon
6.2 Unless any alternative finish is spcified by the purchaser, the circlips shall be chemically and/ or thermally
blackened or Phosphated to class A2 of IS : 3618-1966 Phosphate treatment for iron and steel for protection
against corrosion.
The coated circlips shall be subjected to appropriate
treatment
to avoid hydrogen
embrittlement.
Note - In the case of circlips with electroplated
surface protection, the upper limit of the circlips thickness S may be exceeded
according to the film thickness of the plating required. Thisshall be taken into acccount in the design of the groove.
7. Tests
7.1 Testing of Material
7.1.1 Vickers hardness test in accordance with IS : 1501 (Part l)-1984 Method for Vickers hardness
metallic materials: Part 1 HV 5 to HV 100 (second revision).
7.1.2 Rockwell hardness test in accordance
scales) for steels Cfirst revision).
Notii 1 -
In case of doubt,
Note 2 -
In case of circlips,
7.2 Bend Test and Fracture

7.2.1 The testing
the Vickers hardness

the hardness
test for
with IS : 1586-1968 Methods for Rockwell hardness test (B and C
test applies.
test is regarded
as a destructive
test.
Test
of the circlip for ductility
shall be carried out in accordance
with Fig. 2.
__
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENEKS-PART
199
---
IS : 3075 (Part 1) - 1986
FIG. 2 BEND TEST AND FRACTURE
TEST
7.2.2 One half of the circlip is clamped between two jaws, of which one has a radius equal to the thickness of
the c&lip. The circlip is bent through 30 by repeated light hammer blows or with a lever, following which there
shall be no fractures or cracks in the circlip. The circlip is then further bent until fracture occurs. The fracture
surface shall reveal a fine-grained structure.
7.3 Deformation
Test
7.3.1 Testing the conical deformation - The circlip is placed between two parallel plates and loaded in
accordance with Fig. 3. The distance h--s measured under force Fshall not exceed the maximum value stated as
given in Table 3.
FIG. 3 TESTING
TABLE 3
THE CONICAL
DEFORMATION
TESTING THE CONICAL DEFORMATION

( Clause 73.1 and Fig. 3 )
200
FASTENERS--PART
IS : 3075 (Part 1) - 1986

7.3.2
Testing the spiral flatness
7.3.2.1
Fig. 4):
The circlip shall fall through
Nominal
Diameter
of Circlips
Over
IJp to
100
1.5 x s
100
1.8 X s
FIG. 4
7.4 Testing the Function
two parallel planes with a clearance c as given in table below (read with
(Permanent
TESTING
THE SPIRAL
FLATNESS
Set and Grip Test)
7.4.1 The circlip is passed five times over a cone with a diameter of 1.Ol dl in accordance with Fig. 12 (see A-4)
and then be fitted on to a shaft of minimum groove diameter dz where it shall remain under its own weight.
7.5 Acceptance
Testing
7.5.1 Table 4 applies to features,
while Table 5 applies for the acceptance
TABLE 4
FEATURES
ACCEPTABLE
Acceptable
TEST
For Testing
Quality
dj
QUALITY
LEVEL
Level AQL*
For Testing of Faulty
of Features
* Refer IS: 2500 (Part I)-1973 Sampling

by count of defects vrsr revision).
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
Parts
1.5
HANDBOOK
level (AQL).
Features
Circlip thickness, s
Circlip internal diameter,
Conical deformation
Spiral flatness
Function (set and ario)
TABLE
FOR ACCEPTANCE
quality
inspection
tables: Part
I Inspection
by attributes
and
IS: 3075 (Part 1) - 1986

8. Preservation
8.1 A suitable
and Packing
anti-corrosive
surface treatment
shall be given to the circlips for protection
during
transit.
8.2 Unless otherwise specified, the circlips shall be packed in cartons of 100, 500 and I 000 or multiples
Each carton shall contain circlips of one size only.
thereof.
9. Marking
9.1 The lable on the carton
trade-mark.
9.2 CertiJi:cation Marking
shall carry the designation,

-
Details available
number
with the Bureau of Indian
APPENDIX
( Clause 1.2 )
ADDITIONAL
of pieces and of the manufacturers
name or
Standards.
INFORMATION
FOR LOAD-BEARING
CAPACITY,
DETACHMENT
SHAPE OF.GROOVE
AND FITTING OF CIRCLIPS
SPEED,
A-l. Load-Bearing Capacity - A circlip connection requires separate calculations for the load-bearing capacity
of the groove FN and for the load-bearing
capacity of the circlip FR. In each case the weaker part is that which
applies. The load-bearing
capacities (FN, FR F& given in 3, contain no safety, neither against yielding under
staticstress
nor against fatigue fracture under fluctuating stress. There shall be at least twice the level of safety
against fracture under static stress.
A-l.1 Load-Bearing Capacit.v of Groove, FN - The load-bearing capacity of the groove FN in 3 applies for a
yield point of the material in the region of the shaft groove of Rer = 200 N/mm* as well as for the given nominal
groove depths t and edge margins n. The load-bearing capacity FN for deviating groove depths t(resulting from
deviating shaft diameters dl and /or deviating groove diameters d2) and yield points Rfer.is directly proportional
to the groove depth and the yied point :
FN = ,N..RL
t
200
A-I.2 Load-Bearing Capacity of Cjrcljp, FR - The load-bearing capacity of the h-clip FR in accordance with 3
applies to a sharp-edged abutment of the pressing machine part (see Fig. 5).
The values
and FRg apply to
different material
circlip is directly
F,Q apply to an
circlip materials
with a different
proportional
to
abutment with an edge chamfering distance g (see Fig. 6). The two values FR
with a modulus of elasticity (E-modulus) of 210 000 N/mm*. If circlips of a
E modulusE are used, then, for conversion, the load-bearing
capacity of the
the modulus of elasticity.
FR = FR .
FR~ = F,Q~.
f?
210 000
FIG. 5
202
SHARP
EDGE ABUTMENT
, and
lT
210 000
FIG. 6 ABUTMENT
WITH EDGE CHAMFERING
DISTANCE
(CHAMFERING
OR ROUNDING)
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 3075 (Part 1) - 1986
bearing
If the existing edge chamfering distance gdeviates from the values in 3 then, for conversion;
capacity of the circlip is indirectly proportional
to the edge chamfering distance.
FR~ = Fe If F.Q with small values ofg is greater
Note -
thanF,+
g
7
R
then FR applies,
If the existing forces, because of too great an edge chamfering distance cannot
sharp-edged abutment shall be created by means of a supporting ring (see Fig. 7)
FIG. 7
SHARP
EDGE
ABUTMENT
the load-
WITH
SUPPORTING
be accomodated,
then a
RING
A-2. Detachment Speed, Nds - The application of circlips is limited by speeds at which pretension is relieved by
centrifugal force and at which the circlip starts to lift from its seating in the groove base. In Table 1 and Table 2,
detachment speed N ds are given at which the circlips start to become detached from their seating in the groove
(groove diameter=nominal
diameter). Actual release of the circlip can be expected only after a further increase of
speeds by 50 percent. The values apply to circlips made of spring steels shall be as specified in 4.2.
A-3. Shape of Groove
A-3.1 Groove Diameter, d2 the groove with pretension.
Note -
The groove diameters
Smaller groove diameters
d2 specified in 3 are selected so that the circlips are seated in
are possible if pretension
can be dispensed.
The lower limit is:
dZ Min = d, Max
A-3.2 Groove Width, m - As a rule, for the groove width specified in Table 1 and Table 2, the tolerance zone
H 13 applies. With unilateral power transmission,
the grooves can be widened and/or chamfered towards the
unloaded side. The groove width has no influence on the load-bearing capacity of the circlip connection; Intraplant specified groove shapes and groove widths are therefore possible.
If the circlips is to be subjected to alternate power tansmission
shall as far as possible, for example, also by reducing the tolerance,
groove shapes, see Fig. 8 to 11).
on both groove edges, the groove width m

be matched to the circlip thickness, s (for
Um
FIG. 8 GROOVE
SHAPE
FIG. 9 GROOVE
SHAPE
__^.__
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
203
_.-----a
IS : 3075 (Part 1) - 1986
FIG.
10 GROOVE
SHAPE
A-3.3 Shape of Groove Base - A square shape is the normal type of groove base (see Fig. 8). The radius r on the
load side shall not exceed 0.1 s. Other successful shapes of groove are shown in Fig. 9 to 11. In the case of a sharpedged square groove, the notch sensitivity of the material used produces a corresponding
fatigue notch factor.
A-4. Fitting
A-4.1
of Circlips
Pliers in accordance
with IS : 7990-1976 shall preferably
be used for fitting the circlips.
A-4.1.1 When fitting, make absolutely sure that the circlips are not overspread, that is, are not opened further
than is necessary for fitting over the shaft. If necessary, pliers with opening restriction (set screw) shall be used.
The safest protection against overspreading
is fitting with the aid of cones (see Fig. 12).
PRESSURE SLEEVE
FIG. 12 FITTING
WITH
CONES
HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENEk-PART
IS : 3075 (Part 1) - 1986
EXPLANATORY
NOTE
This standard was issued in 1965, as a comprehensivestandard

based on draft DIN 471-1963 for
dimensions.
Subsequently
in 1981 the DIN standard was revised completely incorporative
of testing and
acceptance requirements,
but sizes and range remain the same.
The Committee, responsible for formulation
bring it in line with the relevant DIN standard.
of this Indian
Standard
(IS : 3075), decided to revise it to
Circlips made from carbon spring steel strips or bars serve as radial spring fasteners for positioning and
retaining components in assembly. Normally, the circlips are axially assembled either over shafts or inside bores.
When the circlips are assembled, a portion of the circlip protrudes from the groove to form a shoulder to
support the abutting part. The part to be retained may be; a ground thrust washer having a full surface contact
with the shoulder providing a sharp-cornered
abutment; or a ball bearing with a radiused edge which will have
contact with only a portion of the shoulder; or a gear wheel with a sharpened edege which will also have contact
with.only a portion of the shoulder. The large corner radius or chamfer will result in a different type of assembly
from that of the sharp cornered abutment.
Thus the fastening system using circlips depends on three elements, namely, the circlip, the groove and the
retained part. In case of axial load transmission,
the circlip serves as a means of transfering the load from the
retained part to the groove wall. However, in cases of impact loading, the energy absorbing capacity of the circlip
will be an important factor. The more energy absorbed, the less will be transferred to the grooved wall.
Earlier standard dealt with the dimensions and other requirements for all types of circlips. In the present
revision, IS : 3075-1965 has been divided into three parts to bring it in line with latest DIN standards. Testing,
acceptance criteria, packaging and IS1 certification marking clauses have also been included.
This standard is Part I which covers requirements of circlips to be assembled over shaft, generally based
on DIN 471-1981 Circlips (retaining rings) for shafts-normal
type and heavy type. In addition to this, the
requirements for radially assembled type of circlips, commonly known as Etype circlips; used for smaller shafts
have been covered in Part 3 of this standard. Other two parts of the standard in this series are:
Part 2 : Specification
for circlips for bores (based on DIN 472-1981); and
Part 3 : Specification
for criclips, Type E for shafts (based on DIN 6799-1981).
HANDlbUOK ON INDUSTRIALFASTENERS
-PART
IS : 3075 (Part 2) - 1986
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
tiOR CIRCLIPS
Part 2 For Bores

( First Revision )
.. Scope
..l Covers the requirement

00 mm in heavy type.
of circlips for bores of nominal
,.2 Additional
4ppendix A.
like load bearing capacity, shape of groove and fitting of circlip have been given in
information
diameter range 8 to 300 mm in normal type and 20 to
!. Symbols
!.l
For the purpose
of this standard,
the following
letter symbols
shall apply:
a -- radial width of the lug

b c -
beam,(radial
distance
width of circlip opposite
between
dl -
bore diameter
& -
groove diameter
dj 1 external
diameter
measuring
plates for testing spiral flatness
of the circlip not under tension
d4 -
minimum
ds -
diameter
of the lug holes
E -
modulus
of elasticity
FN -
the aperture)
symmetrical
diameter
of bore during
fitting
load-bearing
capacity
of groove at a yield point of the grooved material of 200 N/mm* (see A-1.1)
FR -- load-bearing
capacity
of circlip with sharp-edged
capacity
of circlip for abutment
FRR -
load-bearing
ReL -
yield point
g -
edge chamfering
h -
distance
m -
distance
abutment
of the pressure
of the surface abutting
distance
part (see A-1.2)

g (see A-1.2)
against the circlip
between the plates when testing conical deformation
groove width
n -
edge margin
r -
curvature
in the groove base or test jaws
s -
thickness
of the circlip
1-
groove depth with nominal
3. Dimensions,
Tolerances
sizes of dl and dz.
and Design Data
3.1 Dimensions,
tolerances
and design data for circlips, normal type, shall be as given in Table I, read with Fig.
3.2 Dimensions,
tolerances
and design data for circlips, heavy type, shall be as given in Table 2, read with Fig. I
206
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 3075 (Part 2) - 1986
rb
UNLOADED
d, s
d 3
300mm
dy225mm
170mm
DETAILS
AT X
ASSEMBLED
Note 1 -
Location
Note 2 -
Unloaded
* At manutacturers
FIG.
of the lug hole shall be such that it leaves uniform

shape of ring at manufacturers
material
all round.
discretion.
discretion.
DIMENSIONS
FOR CIRCLIPS
FOR BORES
4. Material and Hardness

4.1 The circlips
shall be manufactured
from spring steel of grade
Specification for cold rolled steel strip for springs yirst revision).
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
7OC6 or 7X6
as per IS : 2507-1975
207
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
AND DESIGN
DATA
FOR CIRCLIPS
FOR BORES
NORMAL
TYPE
( Cluuse 3. I and Fig. I)
All dimensions
Cirelip
s
d,
in millimetres.
b*
ds
Max
Min
2.4
I. I
2.5
1.3
ht
Design Data@
Groove
I
0
da
Min
FR
FN
Size
To1
HI3
8.4
+to9
0.9
0.2
0.6
0.86
9.4
(Hll)
0.9
0.2
0.6
3.7
0.96
WV
F.QC
L?
; (kN)
j
I
Nom
Size
of
Pliers
WY
2.00
0.5
I.50
2.00
0.5
I.50
/
0.6
3.3
1.08
1
8
4.00
0.5
2.20
0.2
0.6
4. I
1.17
4.00
0.5
2.30
1. I
0.25
0.8
4.9
1.60
4.00
0.5
+Y
I. I
0.3
0.9
5.4
2.10
4.20
0.5
WI)
I.1
0.3
0.9
6.2
2.25
4.50
0.5
1.7
I. I
0.35
111
7.2
2.80
5.00
0.5
2.30
1.7
I. I
0.4
1.2
3.40
5.50
2.60
2. I
1.7
I. I
0.4
1.2
6.00
/
I
1
I.1
0.2
1.2
1.1
I.7
1.5
3.6
1.8
I.5
I4
3.7
1.9
1.7
I5
3.7
I6
3.8
I7
3.9
3.2
1.4
1.2
II
3.3
1.5
I2
3.4
I3
10.4
1
I
18
4. I
2.2
I9
4. I
2.2
20
4.2
2.3
21
4.2
2.4
I9
+0.13
(H? 1)
22
8.8
I
3.60
1
I. I
0.5
1.5
9.4
4.80
I. 1
0.5
1.5
10.4
5.10
I. 1
0.5
I. I
0.5
I.5
11.2
1.5
12.2
I
I
1
1
2.30
2.30
I
,
2.30
2.50
6.50
6.80
f
/
2.60
2.50
2.50
5.40
7.20
/
j
I
5.70
7.60
2.60
22
4.2
2.5
23
I. I
0.5
1.5
13.2
5.90
24
4.4
2.6
25.2
1.3
0.6
1.8
14.8
j
I
7.70
13.9
/
I
f
4.60
25
4.5
2.7
26.2
1.3
0.6
1.8
15.5
8.00
14.6
4.70
26
4.7
2.8
27.2
1.3
0.6
1.8
16. I
13.85
4.60
28
4.8
2.9
29.4
1.3
0.7
2. I
l7:9
4.50
1.3
0.7
2. I
19.9
13.7
4.60
0.85
2.6
20
13.8
j
!
4.70
30
31
4.8
5.2
3
3.2
2.5
+ 0.21
0
(Hl2)
+0.25
0
31.4
1
32.7
(H12)
I
1.3
.-
8.00
2.70
I9
t
8.40
I 10.5
I
! 11.3
j
/
14.1
1
I
13.3
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND DESIGN DATA FOR CIRCLIPS FOR BORES - NORMAL TYPE-Co&
Des&~ Data8
GrMWe
dzt
ds
dr
45.5
+ 0.9
-0.39
5.9
33.1
1.3
0.85
2.6
20.6
14.6
13.8
4.10
2.5
3k.l
1.6
0.85
2.6
22.6
15.4
26.2
1.5
6.30
26.4
22.5
28.2
1.5
6.70
To1
Min
H13
1.85
4.1
1.25
I
2.5
27.8
3.8
I
1 29.6
1 32
1 30.2
1.25
3.8
33.5
2.5
50.5
1.85
1.25
3.8
2.5
53
2.15
1.5
4.5
2.5
59
2.5
61
2.5
63
2.5
65
25
66
41
1.75
50.5
6.4
4.4
2.5
48
1.75
51.5
6.4
4.5
50.
54.2
6.5
9.6
2
I
44.7
I
1.85
4.3
28.4
I
49.5
6.2
1.25 1 3.8
48.5
OrN)
44.6
21.0
1
1.85 1
1.75
W)
2.5
45
@NJ
FRO
Size
3.8
1.75
Fil
Min
42
FN
8.30
I
8.40
I
43.1 I
31.4
43.5
8.30.
34.5
32.0
43.2
8.40
36.3
40.5
60.8
Nom
Size
of
Pliers 11
8.20
121
+t30
40
(Hl2)
65
25
69.2
7.6
5.8
68
265
1.5
4.5
49
51.8
121
68
25
72.5
7.8
6.1
71
265
1.5
4.5
51.6
54.5
121.5
25
20.8
25
21.2
TABLE 1
DIMENSIONS
AND DESIGN
DATA
FOR.CIRCLIPS
FOR BORES -
NORMAL
G
..
TYPE-Conrd
g
All dimensions
in millimetres.
2:
d,
72
75
t
I--
98
100
k
102
105
t- 108
110
I=
117
112
119
I15
120
127
125
132
I=
1
f 0.08
122
+1.5
-0.63
--
(Continued)
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
AND DESIGN DATA
FOR ClRCLlPS
All dimensions
I
To1
Size
(I
ds
NORMAL
TYPE-Cm&
in millimetres.
. Circlip
d3
FOR BORES -
dzt
To1
hoove
4
HI3
d4
Min
Design Data6
FN
FR
@N)
&N)
138
374
FRG
&NJ
Nom
Size
of
Pliers 11
I
137
4.15
106.9
69.0
142
147
152
+0.63
158
$3)
164
169
I
0.08
174.5
179.5
184.5
189.5
194.5
125
199.5
204.5
209.5
+ 0.72
(H?3)
222
0.09
232
5.15
190.2
349
574
85.0
242
5.15
200.2
365
549
81.0
252
+0.81
0
5.15
210.2
380
525
77.5
262
(HI31
5.15
220.2
396
504
75.0
(Conrinueaj
TABLE
DIMENSIO&S
AND DESIGN
DATA
FOR CIRCLIPS
All dimensions
FOR BORES
NORMAL
TYPE-Conrd
in millimetres.
Cireli
Bore
Dia d,
Nom
Size
Size
260
270
To1
Size
To1
275
16.2
16
268
285
16.2
16
278
+tsl
16.2
16
288
Wl3)
f0.09
280
295
+ 2.0
-0.81
290
305
16.2
16
298
300
315
16.2
16
308
5.15
*Dimension b shall not exceed dimension (I Max.

t See A-3.1.
*See A-3.2.
@he design data apply to circlips of spring steel as per IS : 2507-1975 Specification for cold rolled steel strip for springs (first
(1Pliers conforming to IS : 7989-1976 Specification for pliers for internal circlips.
12
266
revision) , d, is calculated
636
1 466
from d, = dl -
2.1 0.
69.0
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
r.4
c%
-
ti
m
d
t-i
c
d
3
Ici
ci
0.
ti
c.
.i
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 3075 (Part 2) - 1986
213
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
AND DESIGN
DATA
FOR CIRCLIPS
All dimensions
Circlir,
Tol
*
Max
b*
ds
Min
HEAVY
TYPE-Conrd
in millimetres
Design Datn
Groove
FOR BORES
dzt
4
To1
Size
d,
Min
HI3
I
1.5
1 4.5
1 32.2
1.5
4.5
49.5
FN
FR
(W
WY
44.4
94.7
Nom
Size
of
Pliers 11
FRG
WV
1 2
19.6
1.5
4.5
I
*Dimension
t+e A-3.1.
. ^_
b shall not exceed dimension
: 2507-1975,
dq is calculated
from d4 = dl -
51.1
I
174.5
56.2
I
1 2.5
171
I
30.6
2.5
I
30.3
4.5
52.7
58.0
172
2.5
30.3
1.5
4.5
55.5
60.0
170
2.5
30.3
1.75
5.3
60
14.6
308
2.5
56.0
2.1 a.
40
1.5
a Max.
to circlips of spring steel as per IS
54.5
IS : 3075 (Part 2) - 1986
1
4.2 Hardness of the circlips shall be as given below:
Nominal
Over
diameter
of Circlips
UP to
Hardness
I
48
I
470 to 580 Vickers hardness (Corresponding to 47 to 54 Rockwell C hardness)
48
200
I 435
to to44530
to 51
Vickers
Rockwell
hardness
C hardness)
(Corresponding
200
300
I 390
to to40470
to 47
Vickers
Rockwell
hardness
C hardness)
(Corresponding
) Note - Hardness values converted in accordance with IS: 4258-1982 Hardness conversion tables
i for metallic materials Cfirsr revisions.
5. Designation
5.1 A circlip for bore diameter (nominal size) di = 40 mm and thickness = 1.75 mm, normal type (N), shall be
designated as:
Circlip 40 X 1.75 N IS: 3075 (Part 2)

5.2 A circlip for bore diameter (nominal size) di = 40 mm and thickness = 2 mm, heavy type (H), shall be
designated as:
Circlip 40 X 2 H IS: 3075 (Part 2)
6. Finish
6.1 All sharp edges shall be removed from the circlips. The circlips shall be free from burrs, cracks, laminations
and other defects.

6.1.1 The maximum permissible deviation on the profile at engaging lip may also be mutually agreed upon
between the manufacturer and the user in case of special application.
6.2 Unless any alternative finish is specified by the purchaser, the circlips shall be chemically and/ or thermally
blackened or phosphated to Class A2 of IS : 3618-1966 Phosphate treatment of iron and steel for protection
against corrosion. These coated circlips shall be subjected to appropriate treatment to avoid hydrogen
embrittlement.
Note - In case of circlips with electroplated surface protection, the upper limit of the circlip thickness smay beexceeded according
to the film. This shall be taken into account in the design of the groove.
7. Tests
7.1 Testing the Material
7.1.1 Vickers hardness test in accordance with IS : 1501 (Part l)-1984 Method of Vickers hardness test for
metallic material: Part 1 HV5 to HV 100 (second revision).
7.1.2 Rockwell hardness test in accordance with IS : 1586-1968 Methods of Rockwell hardness test (Band C
scales) for steels yirst revision). In case of doubt, the Vickers hardness test applies. In case of circlips, the
hardness test is regarded as a destructive test.
7.2 Bend Test and Fracture Test

7.2.1 The testing of the circlip for ductility shall becarried
FIG. 2
out in accordance with Fig. 2.
BEND TEST AND FRACTURE TEST
HANDBOOK ON INDUSIRIAL FASTENERS -PART 3
215
IS : 3075 (Part 2) - 1986

7.2.2 One half of the circlip is clamped between two jaws, of which one has a radius equal to the thickness of
the circlip. The circlip is bent through 30 by repeated light hammer blows or with a lever, following which there
shall be no fractures or cracks in the circlip. The circlip is then further bent until fracture occurs. The fracture
surface shall reveal a fine-grained structure.
7.3 Deformation
Test
7.3.1 Testing the conical deformation

- The circlip is placed between two parallel plates and loaded in
accordance with Fig. 3. The distance h--s measured under force F shall not exceed the maximum value as given
in Table 3.
F
FIG. 3
TESTING
TABLE 3
THE CONICAL
All dimensions
in millimetres.
Force Fin N f 5%
Nominal Diameter of Circlips

Over
DEFORMATION
TESTING THE CONICAL DEFORMATION

c Clause 7.3.1; and Fig. 3 )
up to
Normal
Type
22
30
60
38
40
80
38
82
60
120
82
150
80
160
150
300
150
300
22
7.3.2 Testing the spiralflatness

- The circlip shall fall through
given in table below (read with Fig. 4):
Nominal
diameter
100
FIG. 4
216
b X 0.03
h x 0.02
two parallel
of Circlips
planes with a clearance
of c as
up to
Over
1
I
h-s
Max
Heavy Type
TESTING
100
1.5 x s
1.8Xs
THE SPIRAL
FLATNESS
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 3075 (Part 2) - 1986

7.4 Testing the Function (Permanent
Set and Grip Test)
The circlip shall be inserted five times into a conicallbore with a diameter of 0.99 d,, in accordance with
Fig. 12 (see A-3) and then be fitted into a bore with maximum groove diameter dz where it shall be held under its
own height.
7.5 Acceptance
Testing
7.5.1 Table 4 applies to the features,
while Table 5 applies for the acceptable
TABLE 4
FEATURES FOR ACCEPTANCE
quality
level (AQL).
TESTS
Function (set and grip)

TABLE 5 ACCEPTABLE
QUALITY LEVEL
Acceptable Quality Level AQL*
For testing of features
For testing of faulty parts
1.5
* Refer1%2500(Part ])-I%? hnphng inspection tables: Part 1 Inspection by attributes and
by count of defects (firsr revision).
8. Preservation
8.1 A suitable
!
/
I
and Packing
anti-corrosive
surface treatment
shall be given to the circlips for protection
8.2 Packing - Unless otherwise specified, the circlips shall be packed

multiples thereof. Each carton shall contain circlips of one size only.
in cartons
during
transit.
of 100, 500 and
1000 or
9. Marking
9.1 The lable on the carton shall carry the designation,
mark.
9.2 Certification
Marking
Details available
number of pieces and the manufacturers
with the Bureau of Indian
APPENDIX
name or trade-
Standards.
( Clause 1.2 )
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
GROOVE
FOR LOAD-BEARING
CAPACITY,
AND FITTING OF CIRCLIP
SHAPE
OF
A-l. Load-Bearing Capacity - A circlip connection requires separate calculations for the load bearing capacity
capacity of the circlip FR. In each case the weaker part is that which
applies. The load-bearing
capacities (FN, F,Q,F,Q.)given in 3 contain no safety neither against yielding under static
load nor against fatigue fracture under fluctuating load. There shall be at least twice the level of safety against
fracture under static load.
A-l.1 Load-Bearing Capacity of Groove, FN - The load-bearing
capacity of the groove FN in 3 applies for a
yield point of the material in the region of the bore groove of R,L - 200 N / mm2 as well as for the given nominal
groove depths t and edge margins n. The load-bearing
capacity FNfor deviating groove depths t'(resulting from
deviating bore diameters dl and/or deviating groove diameters dz) and yield points R,r is directly proportional
to the groove depth and the yield point:
FN=F~.t:.R_Iek
t
200
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
217
IS : 3075 (Part 2) - 1986

A-l.2 Load-Bearing Capacity of Circlip FR - Thd load-bearing
capacity of the circlip FR in accordance
clause 3 applies to a sharpedged
abutment of the pressing machine part (see Fig. 5).
with
CIRCCIP
FIG. 6
ABUTMENT
WITH
EDGE
CHAMFERING
DISTANCE
(CHAMFERING
OR ROUNDING)
The two values FR and FJQapply to circlip materials with a modulus of elasticity (E-modulus) of 210 000
N/mmz. If circlips of a different material with a different E-modulus Eare used, then, for conversion, the loadbearing capacity of the circlip is directly propotional
to the modulus of elasticity.
FR = FR .
E
210 000
F& = FRg .
210 000
If the existing edge chamfering distance g deviates from the values in 3 then, for conversion,
bearing capacity of the circlip is indirectly proportional
to the edge chamfering distance:
FR~ = FRg, - g
the load-
g
Note -
If FfRg with small values of g is greater
than FR, then FR applies.
If the existing forces, because of too great an edge chamfering distance cannot be accommodated,
sharp-edged abutment shall be created by means of a supporting ring (see Fig. 7).
CIRCLIP
7
FIG. 7
SHARP-EDGED
then a
SUPPORTING
RXG
ABUTMENT
WITH
SUPPORTING
RING
A-2. Shape of Groove

A-2.1 Groove Diameter, dz the groove with pretension.
Note -
Larger
groove diameters
The groove diameters
are possible if pretension
d2 specified in 3 are selected so that the circlips are seated in

can be dispensed
with the upper limit is:
d, Mox = d, Min
A-2.2 Groove Width, m -- As a rule, for the groove width specified in Tables 1 and 2, the tolerance zone HI3
applies. With unilateral power transmission,
and grooves can be widened and/or chamfered towards the
unloaded side. The groove width has no influence on the load-bearing capacity of the circlip connection. Groove
shapes and groove H
218
IS: 3075(Part2)-1986
power transmission
reducing tolerance,
FIG. 8
FIG.
10
on both groove edges, the groove width m shall, as far as possible, for example,
be matched to the circlip thickness s (for groove shape, see Fig. 8 to 11):
GROOVE
SHAPE
FIG. 9
GROOVE
SHAPE
FIG. 11
GROOVE
GROOVE
also by
SHAPE
SHAPE
A-2.3
Shape of Groove Base - A square shape is the normal type of groove base (see Fig. 8). The radius r on the
load side shall not exceed 0.1 s. Other successful shapes of groove are shown in Fig. 9 to 11. In the case of sharpedgeds quare groove, the notch sensitivity of the material used produces a corresponding
fatigue notch factor.
A-3. Fitting the Circlip
A-3.1
Pliers in accordance
with IS : 7989-1976 shall preferably
be used for fitting the circhps.
A-3.1.1 When fitting,, make absolutely sure that the circlips are not overstrained, that is, are not squeezed
further together than is necessary for insertion into the bore. If necessary, pliers with closing restriction (set
screw) shall be used. The safest protection against overstretching is fitting with the aid of cones (see Fig. 12).
FIG.
1JANDBOOK ON IKDUSlXIAL
12
PASTICNEBS--PAW
FITTING
WITH
CONES
219
IS : 3075 (Part 2) - 1986
EXPLANATORY
NOTE
This standard was issued in 1965, as a part of comprehensive standard which was based on draft DIN 4721963 for dimensions.
Subsequently,
DIN standard was revised completely with the inclusion of testing and
acceptance requirements.
However, the sizes and range remain the same as that of earlier DIN version.
The committee, responsible
with the relevant DIN standard.
for formulation
of this standard,
decided to revise the same to bring it in line
Circlips made from carbon

retaining components in assembly.
spring steel strips or bars serve as radial spring fasteners for positioning and
Normally, the circlips are axially assembled either over shafts or inside bores.
When the circlips are assembled, a portion of the ring protrudes from the groove to form a shoulder to
support the abutting part. The part to be retained may be a ground thrust washer having a full surface contact
abutment; or a ball bearing with a rediused edge which will have
contact with only a portion of the shoulder;-or a gear wheel with a chamfered edge which will also have contact
with only a portion of the shoulder. The large corner radius or chamfer will result in a different type of assembly
Thus the fastening system using circlips depends on three elements, namely, the circlip, the groove and the
the circlip serves as a means of transferring the load from the
will be an important factor. The more energy absorbed, the less will be transferred to the grooved wall.
IS : 3075-1965 dealt with the dimensions and other requirements for all types of circlips. In the present
revision, IS : 3075-1965 has been divided into three parts to bring it in line with relevant DIN standards. Testing,
acceptance criteria, packaging and ISI Certification marking clauses have also been included.
This Part 2 of the standard, which covers requirements
of circlips to be assembled inside bores, is
generally based on DIN 472-1981 Circlips (retaining rings) for bores-normal
type and heavy type.
The other two parts of the standard
in this series are:
Part 1 Specification
for circlips for shafts (based on DIN 471-1981); and
for circlips -
Type E for shafts (based on DIN 6799-1981).
HANDBOOK
ON IKDUSTRIAI,~AS1'ENERS_PART3
IS : 3075 (Part 3) - 1986

4
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR CIRCLIPS
Part 3 Type E for shafts

( First Revision )
. Scope
.l Covers the requirement
of circlips -
.2 Additional
like load-bearing
Note 8.
information
Radially
assembled
Type E for shafts of nominal

capacity,
and detachment
type of circlips for smaller shafts are commonly
size range of 0.8 to 30 mm.

speed have been given in Appendix
known
by the industry
A.
as Type E circlips.
Symbols
:.l For the purpose

ad1 d, d2 d, E FN Fs
Fsg
Rer
g
m
n
Ndr
s
of this standard,
the following
letter symbols
shall apply:
Width of the opening of the unloaded circlip

Shaft diameter
Shaft diameter to which FN refers
Groove diameter = nominal size
Maximum outside diameter at seating in the groove with nominal diameter
Modulus of elasticity
Load-bearing
capacity of the groove with shaft diameter dl at a yield point of the grooved material
of 200 N/mm* (see A-1.1)
Load-bearing
capacity of the circlip at sharp-edged abutment (see 1.2)
Load-bearing
capacity of the circlip at edge distance g (see A-1.2)
Yield point
Edge chamfering distance
Groove width
Collar.width
Detachment speed (see A-2)
Thickness of the circlip
1. Dimensions,
Tolerances and Design Data -
Shall be as given in Table
1.
and Hardness
1. Material
1.1 The circlips shall be manufactured

from spring steel of grade such as 7OC6 or 75C6 conforming
[S : 2507-1975 Specification for cold rolled steel strips for springs first revision).
1.2 Hardness
Note -
of circlips shall be between 460 and 580 HV (corresponding

Hardness
values converted
as per IS
: 4258-1982 Hardness conversion
to
to 46 to 54 HRC).
tables for metallic
materials
Cfirstrevision).
i. Designation
5.1 A circlip of groove diameter
(nominal
size) d2 = 24 mm shall be designated
CIRCLIP
as:
24 IS : 3075 (Part 3)
i. Finish
i.1 All sharp edges shall be removed from the circlips. The circlips shall be free from burrs, cracks, laminations
*
tnd other defects.
i.2 Unless any alternative finish is specified by the purchaser, the circlips shall be chemically and/ or thermally
slackened or phosphated to class A2 of IS : 3618-1966 Phosphate treatment of iron and steel for protection
against corrosion.
These coated circlips shall be subjected to appropriate
treatment
to avoid hydrogen
:mbrittlement.
Note - In the case of circlips with electroplated surface protection, the upper limit of the thickness smay be exceeded according
the film thickness of the plating required. This shall be taken into account in the design of the groove.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
to
221
TABLE 1
DIMENSIONS
TYPE
( Chuse 3 )
i--4-+---/
-
da--------c
LOADED
UNLOADED
-+u--
ASSEMBLED
*The dimensions specified for groove width m are applicable for general application. For high precision applications and in casts of alternate loading, closer groove width can be chosen. Where accuracy is
tlot so important, wider groove widths can also be specified.
tThe design data applies to circlips of spring steel as per IS : 2507-1975 Specification for cold rolled steel strips for spring Cfirsr revision).
IS: 3075 (Part 3) - 1986

7. ,Tests
7.1 Testing of Material
7.1.1 Vickers hardness test in accordance with IS : 1501 (Part l)-1984 Method for Vickers hardness
metallic materials: Part 1 HV 5 to HV 100 (second revision):
test for
7.1.2 Rockwell hardness test in accordance with IS : 1586-1968 Methods for Rockwell hardness test (B and C
scales) for steel (ji?st revision). In case of doubt, the Vickers hardness test applies. For&clips,
the hardness test
is regarded as a destructive test.
7.2 Testing of the,Toughness
7.2.1 The &clip shall be assembled radially on to a hardened shaft with a diameter
and kept at ambient temperature
for 48 hours. The circlip shall not break.
of 1.1 d2 (nominal
size)
7.3 Testing of Flatness

7.3.1
The circlip shall pass through
7.4 Testing the Function
(Permanent
two parallel
planes with a clearance
of 1.1 s (nominal
size).
Set and Grip Test)
7.4.11The circlip shall be assembled five times radially on to a hardened shaft of diameter dl (minimum
disassembled four times. The circlip shall still sit with force at the fifth assembly.
7.5 Acceptance
Testing
7.5.1 Table 2 applies
TABLE 2
FEATURES
8. Preservation
8.1 A suitable
size) and
to the feature
while Table 3 applies for the acceptable
FOR ACCEPTANCE
TEST
TABLE 3
quality
level (AQL)
ACCEPTABLE
QUALITY
LEVEL
and Packing
anti-corrosive
surface treatment_shall
be given to the circlips for protection
during
transit.
8.2 Unless otherwise specified, the circlips shall be packed in cartons of 100,500 and 1 000 or multiples
Each caiton shall contain circlips of one size only.
thereof.
9. Marking
9.1 The label on the carton
trade-mark.
9.2 ZSZ Certification
224
Marking
shall carry the designation,

-
Details available
number
of pieces and the manufacturers
with the Bureau of lndian
HANDBOOK
name or
Standards.
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 3075 (Part 3) - 1986

APPENDIX
( Clause 1.2 )
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
FOR LOAD BEARING
DETACHMENT SPEED
CAPACITY
AND
A-l. Load Bearing Capacity - A circlip connection requires separate calculations for load-bearing capacities
capacity of the circlip F,. In each case, the weaker part is that which
applies. The load bearing capacities listedin 3 (FN, F,, Fsg) contain no safety against yielding under fluctuating
stress. There is at least twice the level of safety against fracture under static stress.
A-l.1 Load Bearing Capacity of Groove, FN - The FN values in Table 1 (load bearing capacity of the groove)
are applicable to grooves in parts made out of materials up to 200 N/mm* yield point, for collar lengths n and
refer to the shaft diameter dl.
FPJfor materials
The load bearing capacity,

proportional
to the yield point.
FN=
The load bearing

using the formula:
with yield point Rfer.deviating
FN. _!!I%
200
capacity of the groove F!.J, in case of shaft diameter
FIN
FN,
from 200 N/mm* is directly
dl deviating
from ~1, is calculated
d1- d2
d, - d2
A-l.2 Load Bearing Capacity of Circlip, Fs - The load bearing capacity of the circlip Fs according
applicable for a sharp edged abutment of the mating machine part (see Fig. 1).
The values F,, are applicable
(see 3, read with Fig. 2).
FIG.
ABUTMENT
WITH
for an abutment
SHARP
FIG. 2
EDGE
distance g (chamfering
to 3 is
or rounding)
ABUTMENT
WITH CHAMFERED
RADIUSED
EDGE
OR
Both values F, and FsBare applicable for circlip materials with a modulus of elasticity (Youngs modulus
E) of 210 000 N/ mm2. If circlips made of any other material with a different Youngs modulus Eare used, the
load bearing capacity of the circlip is directly proportional
to the Youngs modulus E:
Fs = F,.
F;, = Fs,
E
210 000
E
210 000
If the edge chamfering distance g= deviates from those given in 3, the, load bearing capacity of the circlip
is inversely proportional
to the edge distance.
Fsg = F,,
_i!-.
g
Note -
HANDBOOK
in case of smaller values of g is greater than F,, then F, applies.
ON INDUSTRlAL
FASTENERS-PART
225
IS: 3075 (Part 3) - 1986

A-2. Detachment
A-2.1
Speed
The application
(Nds)
of circlips is limited
by those speeds which can lead to a lifting of the circlips.
Therefore, detachment
speeds Nds at which this lifting can occur are specified
applicable only for circlips made out of spring steels as specified in 4.
EXPLANATORY
in 3. The values are
NOTE
This standard was issued in 1965, as a comprehensive

standard based on draft DIN 6799-1963, for
dimensions.
Consequently,
DIN standard was revised completely with the inclusion of testing and acceptance
requirements.
However, the sizes and range remain the same, as that of earlier DIN revision. This standard is
being revised to bring it in line with the DIN standard.
Circlips made from carbon spring steel strips or bars serve as radial spring fasteners for positioning and
retaining components in assembly. Normally, the circlipsare either axially assembled (either over shafts or inside
bores) or radially assembled over shafts.
When the circlips are assembled, a portion of the ring protrudes from the groove to form a shoulder to
support the abutting part. The part to be retained may be; a ground thrust washer having a full surface contact
abutment; or a ball bearing with a radiused edge which will have
contact with only a portion of the shoulder; or a gear wheel with a chamfered edge which will also have contact
with only a portion of the shoulder. The large corner radius or chamfer will result in a different type of assembly
Thus, the fastening system using circlips depends on three elements, that is the circlip, the groove and the
the circlip servesas a means of transferring the load from the
will be an important factor. The more the energy absorbed, the less will be transferred to the grooved wall.
This standard dealt with the dimensions and other requirements for all types of circlips. In the present
revision, this standard has been divided into three parts to bring it in line with relevant DIN standards. Testing,
acceptance criteria, packaging and BIS certification marking clauses have also been included.
This Part 3 of the standard covers requirements of thecirclips of radially assembled type, most commonly
known as Etype, used for smaller shafts. Inaddition to this, the requirements of circlips, axially assembled over
shafts having diameters 3 to 300 mm, normal and heavy types have been covered in Part 1 of this standard.
Other two parts of the standard
226
in this series are:
for circlips for shafts
for circlips for bores.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :4162 - 1984
.
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
WORM DRIVE HOSE CLAMPS
GENERAL PURPOSES
( First Revision )
FOR
I
Covers the requirements for worm drive hose clamps for general purposes.
I. Scope -
2. Nomenclature
For the purpose of this standard, the nomenclature given in Fig. 1 shall apply.
THRUST WASHER OR
RETAINING PLATE
END OF SCREW
RIVETED OR SPUN
FIG. 1
TYPICA , DESIGN AND NOMENCLATURE
3. Dimensions
FOR WORM DRIVE HOSE CLAMPS
Shall be as given in Table 1.
1. Material - The materials used in the manufacture of worm drive hose clamps shall be selected at the
manufacturers discretion provided that the finished clamps meet the test requirements specified in 10.
5. Manufacture
5.1 Screw -
Shall be held captive in the clamp housing.
5.2 Band - Shall have a thread form commencing at the free end and extending for a length sufficient to enable
tn
nn tn
cmalbrt
ciiam~tw rrf
ranee
_________
. . rnmnnnent
__ ...r-~~_~~~ within the workine
L hC tinhtend
Cn6.xCWU1.
. the
. . . . *.......~Y.
U......v.-.
51~~
--Y for which it is
designed.
1~ rlallly
-r--n
L,,b
5.3 Housing -
Shall not be readily removable from the band.
6. Designation - The hose clamps conforming to this standard shall be designated by nomenclature, size and
number of this standard.
6.1 A hose clamp of size 25 mm shall be designated as:
Hose Clamp 25 IS : 4762
7.1 When the loop is formed, as shown in Fig. 1, the screw shall be held firmly in engagement with the band
during tightening and the clamp shall be capable of being decreased in diameter by turning the screw in clockwise
direction and increased in diameter by turning the screw in anti-clockwise direction.
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
221
IS : 4762- 1984
w
TABLE 1
DIMENSIONS
FOR WORM DRIVE HOSE CLAMPS

( Clause 3 )
Size
12
16
20
22
25
28
30
35
38
40
45
50
55
60
70
75
80
90
100
110
115
120
130
140
145
150
160
22s
Suitable
for Hose Outer Diameters
Min
Jp to and Including
9
12
14
16
I&
20
22
25
30
30
32
38
42
45
50
55
60
70
80
90
95
100
Ii0
125
125
135
140
I2
16
20
22
25
28
30
35
38
40
45
50
55
60
70
75
80
90
100
110
115
120
130
140
145
150
160
X
Max
12
16
20
22
25
28
30
35
38
40
45
50
55
60
70
75
80
90
100
110
115
120
130
140
145
150
160
T
9
12
14
16
18
20
22
25
30
30
32
38
42
45
50
55
60
70
80
90
95
100
110
125
125
135
140
HANDBOOK
2
Max
14
14
14
20
20
25
25
25
25
25
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
8N INDUSTRIAL
25
25
25
25
25
30
30
30
30
30
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
FASTENERS-PART
IS : 4762 - 1984
7.2 Atter expanding until the band is disconnected from the screw it shall be possible to open clamps of size
35 and above to provide a gap equal to the largest diameter of the hose for which the clamp is designed and
to permit easy fitting and removal of the clamp by passing the clamp over the hose in position without
disturbing any connections.
7.3 The clamp shall be so designed that when tightened on the hose, it shall remain positively secured in
position without the need for any additional locking device and in firm engagement with the hose on which
it is fitted.
8. Finish - All component
parts of the clamp shall be smooth and free from burrs and sharp edges.
Clamps other than those manufactured
from corrosion-resistant
materials shall be protected against
corrosion by electroplating in accordance with classification No. Cd8 of IS : 1572 - 1968 Specification for
electroplating
coatings of cadmium on iron and steel virsi revision)or classifjcation No. FeZnl2 of IS :
1573-1970 Specification for electroplating
coatings of zinc on non and steel yir.st revision).
Plating
9. Sampling
shall be applied
and Acceptance
after any welding operation
prior to final assembly.
Criteria
9.1 In order to ensure the quality and reliability of the assembly it is necessary that all its components
conform rigidly to the specified requirements. It is recommended that method given in IS : 397 Method for,
statistical quality control during production:Part
1 - 1972 Control charts for variables Cfirst revisionhand
Part 2 - 1975 Control charts for attributes and count ofdefects (First revision) be used to control the
quality of component
during production.
This will also ensure the homogeneity of the product which is
necessary for successful operation of the sampling procedure given below.
9.2 In any consignment,
all the hose clamps of the same size manufactured
conditions shall be grouped together to constitute a lot.
9.3 Hose clamps shall be selected and examined
the requirements
of this standard.
under essentially
for each lot separately for ascertaining
similar
their conformity
to
9.4 The number of hose clamps to be selected shall depend on the size of the lot and shall be in accordance
withtcol 1 and 2 of .Table 2. These shall be selected at rapdom.
9.5 Number
of Tests and Criteria for Confokmity
9.5.J The hose clamps selected according to 9.4 shall be examined for band (see 5.2) housing (see 5.3),
screw (see 5.1), dimensions (see 3) finish (see 8) and general requirements (see 7). If the number of hose
clamps failing to meet the requirements for any one or more of the above characteristics is less than or equal
to the acceptance number given in coi 3 of Table 2, the lot shall be considered as conforming to the
requirements
of these characteristics.
9.5.2 In case of those lots which have been found satisfactory according to 9.5.1, the number of hose
clamps each equivalent to the sub-sample size indicated in co1 4 of Table 2 shall be chosen and subjected to
the torque tests (see 10.1, 10.2 and 10.3) and hydraulic pressure test (see 10.4). The lot shall be considered
and conforming to the requirements of above characteristics if none of the hose clamps subjected to either
of the tests, fails to meet the specified requirement.
TABLE
SAMPLE, SIZE AND CRITERIA FOR CONFORMITY

( Clauses 9.4, 9.5.1 and 9.5.2 j
Lot Size
Sample Size
(1)
(2)
8
13
20
32
50
1 001 and above

*To ensure that the lot containing
ON INDUSTRIAL
2.5 percent or less defectives
FASTENERS-PART
Number*
(3)
0
0
up to 100
101 to 150
151 to 300
301 to 500
501 to 1 000
HANDBOOK
Acceptance
I
I
2
3
will be accepted
most of the times.
Sub-sample
(4)
2
2
3
5
8
13
Size
IS :4762 - 1984
9.5.3 The lot shall be declared as conforming
and 9.5.2 are satisfied.
to the requirements
of this standard
if conditions
given in9.W
10. Tests
10.1 Free-turning Torque Test - This test shall be conducted to ensure the smooth action of the lubricated
clamp in its free-turning state. For this purpose, the torque required to move the screw in either direction shall
not exceed 1.5 Nm.
10.2 Torque Test - The test shall be conducted with the hose clamp in lubricated condition mounted on a rigid
mandrel of a diameter equal to the designating size of the clamp. A suitable test rig is shown in Fig. 2. Alternative
methods of applying the torque load are permissible provided that the conditions imposed by the torque rig
illustrated in -Fig. 2are simulated exactly:
PULLEYS
SPRING
BALANCE
BALANCE
WEIGHT
TING
AOJUSTER
FIG.2
DIAGRAMMATIC
ARRANGEMENT
OF TYPICAL
RIG FOR TORQUE
TEST
The clamp shall be tightened to 75 percent of the appropriate torque load as shown below.On release of
the torque load, visual examination
of the assembly shall reveal no sign of permanent distortion of the housing
nor damage detrimental to the efficient functioning
of the clamp. The clamp shall then be retightened until
permanent distortion or failure occurs. The torque load at permanent distortion or failure shall be in excess of the
appropriate value shown below:
Size
12?Zrn 20
22 to 28
30 to 40
45 to 60
70 to 160
Torque
Nm
4.51
5.49
6.77
7.94
9.02
10.3 Fatique Torque Lading

Test - The test shall be conducted with the same set up described in 10.2. The
clamp shall then be subjected to a torque loading and release of torque loading to the values specified in 10.2, at
least 10 times, without resulting in any distortion or permanent deformation
of the clamp as a whole.
230
HANDBOOK.ONINDUSTRIALFASTENERS-PART3
IS : 4762- 1984
10.4
Hydraulic
Pressure
Test
10.4.1 The test shall be conducted on a joint assembly asshown in Fig. 3 using a hose of outside diameter equal
to the mean of the working range of the clamp. The hose shall comply with the requirements of IS : 444 - 1980
Specification for rubber water hose (third revesion). Two samples of each size of clamp shall be tested and the
following conditions shall be observed.
10.4.2 Test procedure - The hose and clamps shall be assembled on a pair of round, parallel, externally
smooth and polished metal pipes, one of which shall be blanked at its outer end and provided with a bleed screw
to permit release of air. This pipe shall be free to move axially so that the external pressure through the outer pipe
produces a tensile load on the joints.
E CLAMPS
FIG. 3 ARRANGEMENT
10.4.3
torque
The torque to be applied

value specified in 10.2
FOR HYDRAIJLIC
when tightening
UNDER
PRESSURE
TEST
TEST
the clamps shall not exceed 75 percent of the appropriate
10.4.4 The fluid used for the test shall be water at room temperature. Pressure shall be applied gradually from
an external source until leakage or other failure occurs, at which stage the pressure shall not be less than the
appropriate
value specified below:
Size
Minimum
Pressure
M pa
*2:m30
35, to 70
75 to 160
11. Marking - The hose clamps shall be permanently
the nominal size ( see Table 1 ).
11.1 ZSZ Certifjcation
Marking
Details available
1.41
0.84
0.42
marked with the manufacturers
with the Indian
Standards
name or trademark
and
Institution.
This standard was originally published in 1968. In view of the experience gained by the Indian Industry
this field, the standard is being revised. In this revision manufacturer has been provided with greater flexibility
the design of the hose clamps.
in
in
While revising this standard considerable assistance has been derived from BS 53 15 - 1976 Hose clamps
(worm drive type) for general purpose use (metric series), issued by the British Standards Institution.
IS :5988 - 1970
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
( LIGHT AND HEAVY
1. Scope 2. Dimensions
Requirements
FOR SPRING DOWEL SLEEVES

PATTERNS ) FOR USE IN FOUNDRIES
for spring dowel sleeves for use in foundries.
Also used as spring dowel pins.
and Tolerances
2.1 As given in Tables
1 to 4 and in Fig. 1.
--
N0Mlwl OU %nm AND.*BOVt
All dimensions
FIG. 1 SPRING
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
FOR SPRING
--
in millimetres.
DOWEL
DOWEL
SLEEVES
SLEEVES
( LIGHT
PATTERN
1
Preferred
Length
Range
(from Up
to and
Including)
L
I
Nominal
Diameter
mm
Before Fitting
Tolerance
on d,
dl
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
6
7
8
IO
11
12
13
I4
16
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.75
0.75
0.75
1
I
I
i._
1.25
1.5
1
~__IY5., .!
0.35
0.45
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
I.6
1.6
I.6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
.-
2.3
2.8
3.3
3.8
4.4
4.8
5.4
6.4
7.5
8.5
10.5
__-I
11.5
12.5
13.5
14:5
16.5
+ 0.1
+ 0.2
+ 0.3
Q
w
For Bolt
Size
_ [IS: 4218
(Part 6)1967*] 6g
1.9
2.3
2.7
3. I
3.4
3.8
4.4
4.9
6.0
7.0
8.5
9.5
10.5
Corres-
1 ponding
Washer
(IS : 20161967t)
11.0
1
11.5
I
13.5
,....
i
._.. _._
_.MI2
:
___ _
13
..__,
4-30
4-30
4-40
4-40
4-50
4-50
5-80
IO-100
10-100
IO-120
IO-160
IO-160
IO-180
IO-180
IO-180
IO-200
.*
7
I
1
(Continued)
232
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
IS :5988 - 1970
TABLE
DIMENSIONS
Nominal
Diameter
mm
FOR SPRING
DOWEL
2.
$75
21
23
25
28
30
35
40
45
50
1
I
;
2.5
2.5
3.5
4
4
5
I
:
18.5
20.5
21.5
23.5
?5.5
28.5
30.5
35.5
40.5
45.5
50.5
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
PATTERN)
For Bolt
Size
[IS : 4218
(Part 6)1967*] 6g
---
(LIGHT
Before Fitting
II
Tolerance
on dl
;t
SLEEVES
>%ontd
Corres-
ponding
Washer
(IS : 20161967?)
*
1_5.0_
16.5
Ml4
-
!,r
17
19
21
23
25
28
31
37
40
MI6
Ml8
M20
M22
M24
M27
M30
M36
M39
--
Preferred
Length
Range
(from Up
to and
Including)
L
1O-200
IO-200
14-200
14-200
14-200
14-200
14-200
20-200
20-200
20-200
20-200
dowel sleeve (light pattern) of 10 mm nominal diameter and length 40 mm to be designated

Spring Dowel Sleeve Lighi 10 X 40 IS : 5988.
*ISO metric screw threads : Part 6 Limits of sizes for commercial bolts and nut& (diameter range I to 5.2 mm).
tspecification
for plain washers C&r revision).
Designorion
-- Spring
TABLE
Nominal
Diameter
mm
DIMENSIONS
FOR SPRING DOWEL

( Clause 2.1 )
Before Fitting
dr
I
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
6
8
10
12
13
14
16
18
20
21
25
28
30
32
35
38
40
45
50
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.75
0.8
1
I
1.25
1.5
2
2.5
2.5
3
3
3.5
4
4
5
5.5
6
6
7
7.5
7.5
8.5
9.5
Designorion
SLEEVES
0.15
0.25
0.35
0.45
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
1.6
1.6
2
2
2
2
.2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
+ 0.1
+ 0.2
+ 0.3
+ 0.4
of 10 mm nominal
Size
[IS : 4218
(Part 6)19671 6g
0.8
1.1
1.5
1.8
2. I
2.3
2.8
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
Corresponding
Washer
(IS : 2016
1967)
Preferred
Length
Range
(from Up
to and
Including)
L
4-20
4-20
4-30
4-30
4-40
4-40
4-50
5-50
5-80
10-100
IO-120
IO-160
IO-180
IO-180
IO-200
IO-200
IO-200
I O-200
14-200
14-200
14-200
14-200
20-200
20-200
20-200
20-200
20-200
20-200
2.9
3.4
3.9
5.5
6.5
7.5
8.5
8.5
10.5
11.5
12.5
13.5
15.5
17.5
18.5
20.5
21.5
23.5
25.5
28.5
31.5
diameter
Spring Dowel Sleeve Heavy 10 X 40 IS
HANDBOOK
PATTERN)
I For Bolt
Tolerance
on d,
1.2
1.7
2.3
2.8
3.3
3.8
4.4
4.9
5.4
6.4
8.5
10.5
12.5
13.5
14.5
16.5
18.5
20.5
21.5
25.5
28.5
30.5
32.5
35.5
38.5
40.5
45.5
50.5
Spring dowel sleeve (heavy pattern)
(HEAVY
--
M3
M4
M5
M6
-
3.2
4.3
5.3
6.4
ME
MI0
-
8.4
10.5
Ml2
Ml4
Ml6
-
13
15
17
Ml8
M20
M22
M24
M27
M30
19
21
23
25
28
31
and length 40 mm to be designated
: 5988.
as:
IS : 5988 - 1970
TABLE 3
PREFERRED
( Chse 2. I
LENGTHS
Length
In Steps of
mm
mm
4to 6
6 o 32
2
4
5
20
32 7. 40
40 ,, 100
100 ,, 200
TABLE 4
TOLERANCES
ON LENGTH
( Clause 2.1 )
Length
Tolerance
mm
mm
4to 10
IL?,, 50
so ,, 200
+ 0.5
+ 1.0
+ 1.5
3. Tolerance
3.1 The nominal diameter of sleeve is also the nominal
bore shall be H 12.
diameter
of the receiving
bore. Tolerance
on receiving
3.2 The width of the longitudinal

gap in the sleeve shall be not less than the difference
dr and nominal diameter of the sleeve with a maximum tolerance equal to the tolerance
This gap size is applicable when the sleeve is not inserted.
between dimension
on dimension di.
4. Material i
150 to 190 kgf/mm*
5. Technical
Spring steel 55Si2Mn90,

Requirements
heat treated to 445 to 515 HVand
tensile strength
and Tests
5.1 The surface of spring dowel sleeves shall be smooth and free from scale and burr. The outer edges along the
slit and around the ends shall normally be deburred, but alternatively may be slightly rounded.
5.2 Shear Strength - Shear strength shall not be less than 0.45 times the tensile strength. Test method in
accordance with IS : 5242-1969 Methods of test for determining shear strength of mild steel, but with shearing
edges of 700 HV, Min.
5.3 Resilience and Recovery Test - Resilience and recovery shall be tested by driving the sleeve ten times
through a hole of nominal size, within the tolerance zone H6 in a hardened steel plate of St 60. The maximum
reduction in the oversize on the diameter shall not exceed 50 percent of the oversize in delivery condition, for
example, the outside diameter shall not be less than 10.25 mm on reduction from 10.5 mm for a spring dowel
sleeve of 10 mm nominal diameter.
6. Sampling
7. Marking -
In accordance
with IS : 2614-1964 Methods
The sleeves shall be marked
a) Designation,
b) Trade-mark
7.1 ISI Certlpcation
for sampling
of fasteners.
with the following:
and
or name of the manufacturer.
Marking
Details available
from the Indian
Standards
Institution,
8. Packing
8.1 A thin film of rust preventive
8.2 Packed in waterproof
oil shall be applied.
paper and placedin
cartons
or wooden boxes in bundles
8.3 Packets may be placed in wooden
boxes weighing not more than 50 kg overall.
8.4 Packets
described
shall bear the information
9. General Conditions of Delivery - In accordance

metallurgical
meterials (first revision).
234
under 7, and also the number
of 10, 25 or 50.
of pieces.
with IS : 1387-1967 General requirements
HANDBOO&
ON INDUSTRIAL
for the supply of
FASTENERS-PART
INDEX
Aircraft
Rivets for
100 countersunk
aluminium
alloy 9087
100 countersunk
nickel alloy 9093
Universal head aluminium
alloy 9086
Universal head nickel alloy 9088
Bifurcated rivets 3974
Boiler rivets 1928
Circlip 3075
Clamps, hose 4762
Clevis pin 6862
with head 6863
Cotton, set 2995
Copper wire nails 725
Cotters
Flat, split 2638
Pin, split 549
Cut lath nails 6734
Cylindrical pins 2393, 6689, 10248
Dowel pins
For foundries 6401
Spring 5988
Grooved 7385
Dowel sleeves 5988
Felt nails 6730
Gib-head keys and keyways 2293
Grooved pins 7368, 7384, 7385, 7386
Guide pins 4981
Hose clamps 4762
Keys and keyways
Gib-head 2293
Parallel 2048
For machine tools 2710
Thin 6167
Tangential 2291
Taper 2292
Thin 6266
Woodruff 2294
Knuckle pins 7383
Lath nails 6734
Nails
Copper 725
Countersunk
head 723
Cut lath and lath 6734
Double point 6732
Felt 6730
Lost head 6738
Panel pins 6738
Wall and roofing 6733
Panel pins 6738
Parallel keys keyways 2048
For machine tools 2710
Pins
Clevis 6862
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART
with head 6863

Cylindrical
Hardened 6689
Unhardened
2393
With internal threads 10248
Dowel
For foundries 6401
Spring 5988
Grooved
Dowel 7385
Knuckle 7383
Socket 7386
Straight 7384
Taper 7368
Guide 4981
,Locating
Panel 6738
Spiral
Heavy duty 8351
Medium duty 8379
Taper 6688
Grooved 7368
Threaded 3524
Rivets
Aircraft
Aluminium/ alloy
100 countersunk
9087
Universal head 9086
100 countersunk
nickel alloy 9093
Universal head 9088
Bifurcated 3974
Boiler 1928
Cold closing 2998
General purpose 1929
Hot ciosing 2155
Non-ferrous 2907
Shipbuilding
4732
Tinmens 866
Tubular and semi-tubular
4040
Set collars 2995
Shipbuilding
rivets 4732
Sleeves, dowel 5988
Socket pins 7366
Spiral pins 8351, 8379
Split totters 2638
Split pins 549
Spring dowel sleeves 5988
Tangential keys and keyways 2291
Taper keys and keyways 2292, 6166
Taper pins 7368
Tinmens rivets 866
Tubular rivets 4040
Woodruff keys and keyways 2294
235
Numerical
IS Number
549-1974
723-1972
725-1961
866-1957
1928-1961
1929-1982
2048-1983
2155-1982
2291-1981
2292-l 974
2293-1974
2294-1980
2393- 1980
2638- 1974
2907- 1964
2995- 1965
2998-1982
3075 (Part
3075 (Part
3075 (Part
3524 (Part
3524 (Part
3974- 1967
4040-l 967
4732-l 968
4762-l 984
HANDBOOK
Page
IS Number
Page
4981-1984
5988-1970
6166-1971
6167-1971
6401-1971
6688-1981
6689-1972
6730-I 972
6732-l 972
6733-1972
6734-1972
6738-1972
6862-l 98 1
6863-1973
7368-1974
7383-1974
7384-1974
7385-1974
7386-l 974
8351-1977
8379-1977
9086-1979
9087-1979
9088- 1979
9093- 1979
10248-d 982
1)-1987
2)-1987
3)-1987
1)-1982
2)-1982
ON INDUSTRIAL
Index
FMTENERS-PART
237
I
IS0 STANDARDS
S. No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
238
ON RIVETS, PINS AND OTHER NON-THReADED
IS0 : No.
245
R 1051
1234
2338
2339
2340
2341
8733
8736
8737
8739
8740
8741
8742
8743
8744
8745
8746
8747
1986 :
1969 :
1976 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
FASTENERS
Title
Aircraft-lockwire
Rivet shank diameters (diameter range 1 to 36mm)
Split pins-Metric series
Parallel pins, unhardened
Taper pins, unhardened
Clevis pins without head
Clevis pins with head
Parallel pins .with internal thread, unhardened
Taper pins with internal thread; unhardened
Taper pins with external thread, unhardened
Grooved pins-Full-length parallel grooved, with pilot
Grooved pins-Full length parallel grooved, with chamfer
Grooved pins-Half-length
reverse taper grooved
Grooved pins-Third-length
centre grooved
Grooved pins-Half-length centre grooved
Grooved pins-Full-length taper grooved
Grooved pins-Half-length taper grooved
Grooved pins with round head
Grooved pins with countersunk head
HANDBOOK
ON INDUSTRIAL
FASTENERS-PART

SP29 3 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SP29 3 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HANDBOOK

FIRST PUBLISHED MARCH 1989

@ BUREAU -OF INDIAN STANDARDS

NEW DELHI- 110002;

is bringing out a series of handbooks

on bolts screws, studs, nuts and washers.

on rivets, pins, nails, keys and keyways, totters,

have been formulated

circlips, and set-collars,

mainly by the following

EDC 27 Bolts, Nuts and Fasteners Accessories

The A-4 size standards

Specification for Tinmens Rivets

Specification for Boiler Rivets (12 to 48 mm Diameter)

Specification for Hot Forged Steel Rivets for Hot Closing

Specification for Non-ferrous Rivets (1.6 to 10 mm)

Specification for Cold Forged Steel Rivets for Cold Closing (I to 16 mm

Specification for Bifurcated Rivets for General Purposes

Specification for Solid-Drilled Tubular and Semi-tubular Rivets

Specification for Rivets for Shipbuilding

Specification for Universal Head Aluminium Alloy Rivets for Aircraft

Specification for 100 Countersunk Aluminium Alloy Rivets for Aircraft

Specification for Universal Head Nickel Alloy Rivets for Aircraft

Specification for 100 Countersunk Nickel Alloy Rivets for Aircraft

Specification for Split Pins (second revision)

Specification for Cylindrical Pins (second revision)

Specification for Threaded Taper Pins: Part 1 With Internal Threads

Specification for Threaded Taper Pins: Part 2 With External Threads

Specification for Dowel Pins for Use in Foundries

Specification for Taper Pins lfirst revision)

Specification for Hardened Cylindrical Pins

Specification for Clevis Pins (@St revision)

Specification for Clevis Pins with Head

Specification for Grooved Taper Pins

Specification for Grooved Knuckle Pins

Specification for Grooved Straight Pins with Guide End

Specification for Grooved Dowel Pins

Specification for Grooved Socket Pins

Specification for Spiral Pins (Heavy Duty Type)

Specification for Spiral Pins (Medium Duty Type)

Specification for Cylindrical Pins with Internal Threads

Specification for Steel Countersunk Head Wire Nails (second revision)

Specification for Copper Wire Nails (revised)

Specification for Felt Nails

Specification for Double Point Nails

Specification for Wall and Roofing Nails

Specification for Cut Lath and Lath Nails

Specification for Panel Pins and Lost Head Nails

KEYS, KEYWAYS AND COTTERS

Specification for Parallel Keys and Keyways (second revision)

Specification for tangential Keys and Keyways (second revision)

Specification for Taper Keys and Keyways first revision)

Specification for Gib-head Keys and Keyways (first revision)

Specification for Woodruff Keys and Keyways cfirst revision)

Specification for Flat Split Cotters first revision)

Specification for Thin Taper Keys and Keyways

Specification for Thin Parallel Keys and Keyways

Dimensions for set collars

Specification for Circlips : Part 1 For Shafts Cfirst revision)

Specification for Circlips : Part 2 For Bores Cfirst revision)

Specification for Circlips : Part 3 Type E for shafts Cfirst revision)

Specification for Worm Drive Hose Clamps for General Purposes